JP2024036501A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 includes a distribution device 35 for distributing game balls introduced from an introduction hole 350 to a first passage 351 or a second passage 352 by a distribution part 38. Triggered by detection of passage of game balls through the second passage 352 by a through gate 318, an electric support member 36 operates from a standby position for limiting entry of game balls into a second start pocket 315 through the second passage 352 to an operation position for permitting entry of game balls through the second passage 352 into the second start pocket 315. Game balls in the first passage 351 can enter a first left start pocket 314L. Game balls in the second passage 352 can enter the second start pocket 315 having a different function from that of the first left start pocket 314L by the electric support member 36.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Generally, a pachinko game machine called DigiPachi is equipped with a first opening for performing a jackpot lottery when a game ball wins. In addition, some gaming machines are equipped with a second starting port that allows the game balls to win by operating an electric accessory, in order to allow players to win many jackpot lots with a small number of game balls. Further, some gaming machines include a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting port and a second starting port (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-231902

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the attention to the game and the interest in the game to increase the player's desire to play.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase attention to the game and interest in the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
a first prize opening (314L) into which game balls sorted into the first passageway (351) can enter;
a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can be inserted and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314L);
a detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is opened in the second prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the second prize opening (315) is permitted, to a second position where the ball passing through the second passageway (352) is allowed to enter the second prize opening (315). a movable accessory member (36) that moves to the (operating position);
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase attention to the game and interest in the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play a jackpot game.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 5(A) is a sectional view showing an example of the distribution device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 5(B) is a sectional view showing an example of the distribution member of the distribution device. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the action of the distribution member. FIG. 3 is a sectional view for explaining the action of the sorting device. FIG. 3 is a sectional view for explaining the action of the sorting device. 5(A) and 5(B) are sectional views for explaining the action of the sorting device, and FIG. 5(C) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start prize winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a through gate processing procedure executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 14. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal electric accessory control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 20. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine based on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine based on the 3rd embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine based on the 4th embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 35 is a diagram showing main parts of the special variable prize winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. 43 is a sectional view showing the main parts of the wing accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a sectional view showing the main parts of the wing accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the wing accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. A sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 53(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 53(B) is a sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the device. FIG. 54(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 54(B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the device. FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55(B) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55(C) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. 56(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the 16th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A1-A1 in FIG. 56(A). FIG. 57(A) is a sectional view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 57(C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 58(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A2-A2 in FIG. 58(A). FIG. 59(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 59(B) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main parts of the support member. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing the main parts of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main parts of the support member. FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of an electric supporting member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 63(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 in FIG. 63(A). FIG. 64(A) is a diagram showing main parts of a game board including an allocating device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the 30th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 64(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 65(A) is a diagram when the electric support member is in a standby state in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 65(B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line in FIG. 65(A). 66(A) is a diagram when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 66(B) is a sectional view taken along the A4-A4 cutting line in FIG. 66(A). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric tulip accessory device of a game machine according to a 31st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing main parts of a game board including an allocating device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a thirty-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board including the sorting device and the electric support member of the game machine based on this form. FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including an allocating device of a gaming machine according to the 34th embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in a standby state, and FIG. A) is a perspective view of the main part. FIG. 70(A) is a view showing the main parts when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 69(A), and FIG. 70(B) is a perspective view showing the main parts in FIG. 70(A). FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including the sorting device and electric support member of a gaming machine according to the 35th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 71(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of FIG. 71(A). FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including a distribution device and an electric support member of a game machine according to a thirty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 73(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including the sorting device and the electric support member in the standby position of a gaming machine according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. A) is a perspective view of the main part. FIG. 74(A) is a diagram showing the electric support member in the operating position in FIG. 73(B), and FIG. 74(B) is a plan view showing a modification of the electric support member in the 37th embodiment of the present invention. . FIG. 75(A) is a diagram showing main parts of a game board including an allocating device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 75(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 76(A) is a sectional view taken along the A5-A5 cutting line in FIG. 75(B), and FIG. 76(B) is a sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 75(B). FIG. 77(A) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the standby position, and FIG. 77(B) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the operating position. Diagram showing. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member in the 38th embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, first to thirty-eighth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example of embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but other games such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball game machine, and a play ball game machine can also be used. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having its left end rotatably supported by the outer frame 14 . Moreover, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 10) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance etc. that is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined specific period in a special figure game performance.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact type switch, and may be a piezoelectric element, for example, as long as it can be used to detect whether or not the player has operated the switch 20a.

Furthermore, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player. Furthermore, in place of the operation button 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. Further, the operation button 20 may include a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 in the special figure game performance will be reflected in the operation button performance, etc.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is played by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls put out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball to the game ball firing mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls in the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and output audio during game performances and the like. Note that the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp or an LED, and performs a lamp effect by lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. Note that, in FIG. 2, the description on the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general prize opening 313, a left first starting opening 314L, a right first starting opening 314R, a second starting opening 315, and a variable winning opening 316b. A variable prize winning device 316, an out port 317 (discharge port), a first through gate 318, a second through gate 319, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 37, a sorting device 35, and an electric support which is a normal electric accessory. A member 36 (movable accessory member) is provided. Hereinafter, the first left starting opening 314L and the first right starting opening 314R correspond to winning openings with the same function, and will be collectively referred to as the "first starting opening 314." The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 314, 315." Further, the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 may be collectively referred to as "through gates 318, 319." In addition, the general winning hole 313, the first starting hole 314, the second starting hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316b correspond to winning holes having different functions.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. And, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the various winning holes (general winning hole 313, first starting hole 314, second starting hole 315, or variable winning hole 316b) It is discharged from the out port 317.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the out opening 317 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front and back direction. ing. The general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b each include an entrance sensor 313a that can individually detect the passage of a game ball, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 10). The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes.

The through gates 318 and 319 are gates through which game balls can pass. The through gates 318, 319 have ball entrance sensors 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 318, 319. The ball entry sensors 318a and 319a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes. When the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, a normal symbol winning lottery (normal judgment) is performed to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory that supports winning to the second starting port 315. ) is carried out. However, the normal symbol winning lottery is not executed in the jackpot game state. Note that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is clearly indicated by a normal symbol that is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of a pair of LED lamps on a normal symbol display 373, which will be described later. Hereinafter, the "normal symbol" may be abbreviated as "common symbol", and for example, "common symbol random number storage area" is an abbreviation of "normal symbol retention area".

Here, the first through gate 318 is provided in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 arranged at the center of the lower part of the game board 31, and the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 is detected by the ball entering sensor 318a. do. On the game board 31, when the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes through the left side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit to the left, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the first through gate 318. Note that the first through gate 318 may be provided on the upstream side of the electric support member 36 in the path leading to the right first starting port 314R in the distribution device 35, for example, in the vicinity of the introduction port 350 above the distribution member 38. May be placed. It is also possible to arrange the first through gate 318 outside the sorting device 35 and near the life nail (belly button nail) 31H, so that the life nail (belly button nail) 31H is omitted and the life nail (belly button nail) is omitted. ) It is also possible to arrange it in the part where 31H was provided. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the ball entry sensor 318a can detect passage of a game ball in a specific area (in the present embodiment, the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35), and there is no need to configure it as a through gate. In this case, it is also conceivable to attach a mark to the distribution device 35 at the position of the ball entry sensor 318a to indicate that the area is a specific area.

On the other hand, the second through gate 319 is provided on the right side of the game board 31 and above the right part of the variable prize winning device 316. On the game board 31, when the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes through the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit to the right, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the second through gate 319.

Ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, The detection result of 319a is input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the ball entering the game ball by the ball entering sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a may be referred to as winning. Note that the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls using other detection methods. It may be any sensor.

The variable prize winning device 316 includes, in addition to the variable winning hole 316b, an opening/closing door 316c that switches whether or not to limit the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316b. The opening/closing door 316c is opened/closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the variable winning device 316, when the opening/closing door 316c opens, it becomes possible for game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316b, and when the opening/closing door 316c closes, the entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316b is restricted. be done. The variable prize winning device 316 is arranged on the right side of the game board 31, and the opening/closing door 316c is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot and the player shifts to the jackpot game state, the player enters the variable prize opening 316b by hitting right in the round game in which the opening/closing door 316c opens. You can win the ball. This allows the player to obtain more prize balls in the jackpot game than in the special figure game.

In the game machine 10, when entry of a game ball into the left first starting port 314L, right first starting port 314R, or second starting port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314La, 314Ra or the ball entering sensor 315a, the main A jackpot lottery (special determination) is performed by the control unit 331. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display section 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery results from the main control unit 331 are transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery results.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b, the entering ball sensor 313a, When detected by 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the general winning hole 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315 is three, and the number of winning balls when the ball enters the variable winning hole 316b. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game enters a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable prize opening 316b is opened for round gaming (unit gaming). ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 5, 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed as described above. If the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (first determination result and second determination result), the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 2R normal jackpot gaming state, a 2R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 5R normal jackpot gaming state, a 5R probability varying jackpot gaming state, and a 16R probability varying jackpot gaming state. The 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R definite variable jackpot game state are two round games in which the variable winning hole 316b is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the variable winning hole 316b. This is a gaming state including an opening/closing execution mode. The 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R probability variable jackpot game state are game states in which a round game is played 5 times in the open/close execution mode, and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state in which a round game is played 16 times in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, it is possible to acquire the same amount of game balls in round games in any game state, and in terms of the game balls that can be acquired, the more round games in the opening/closing execution mode, the more the player can earn the game balls. This is an advantageous gaming situation. Therefore, in this embodiment, in terms of the number of game balls that can be acquired, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the most advantageous for the player, followed by the 5R normal jackpot gaming state and the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. Yes, the 2R normal jackpot gaming state and the 2R certain variable jackpot gaming state are the most disadvantageous for the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as a liquid crystal display, arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. The symbol display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the symbol display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display section 341 displays a symbol variation display and a special symbol according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315. Various displays such as game presentation displays are performed. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-display sections in addition to the symbol display section 341. The sub-display section is arranged, for example, at the top, bottom, left, or right of the symbol display section 341. The sub-display section may be movable between a position where the symbol display section 341 is covered and a position where the symbol display section 341 is not covered. Further, the sub-display section may be arranged on the upper tray 23.

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols numbered, for example, from "1" to "9" in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc. Note that sub-symbols such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special pattern game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. Ru. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, all the main symbols first vary along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and then the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbols on all lines stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the symbol fluctuation display ends.

The main display section 37 is arranged at the upper right corner of the game board 31 and displays a first special symbol display 371 (first special symbol display section), a second special symbol display 372 (second special symbol display section), and a normal symbol. It includes a display 373 and a pending number display 374. Note that the main display section 37 may be placed at the lower left or lower right of the game board 31.

The first special symbol display 371 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning in the first start opening 314. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the first special symbol display 371 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, in response to winning in the first starting opening 314, in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the first special symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display 371 in a variable manner and then stopped. It's called a pattern game.

The second special symbol display 372 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning in the second starting opening 315. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the second special symbol display 372 is referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, displaying the second special symbol by changing it and then stopping it in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in response to winning in the second starting opening 315 is referred to as a second special symbol game.

Note that the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as simply a special symbol. Also, the "special design" may be abbreviated as "tokuzu". For example, "first special symbol" and "second special symbol" are abbreviations for "first special symbol" and "second special symbol," respectively, and "first special symbol game" and "second special symbol" are abbreviations for "first special symbol" and "second special symbol," respectively. ” are abbreviations for “first special symbol game” and “second special symbol game”, respectively. Furthermore, the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 are not limited to 7-segment displays, but are LED groups in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a straight line, circle, arc, matrix, etc. It may be.

The normal symbol display 373 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory) in the main control unit 331 (whether or not to put it in a support state) in response to winnings in the through gates 318 and 319. The lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is clearly indicated. The normal symbol display 373 includes a pair of LED lamps, and clearly indicates the lottery result by a normal symbol that is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LED lamps. It should be noted that the normal symbol display 373 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED or the like instead of the LED lamp pair.

In the pending number display 374, the pending number N of the variable display of special symbols generated by winning in the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 is displayed by a plurality of LED lamps (eight in this embodiment) arranged in a row. Displayed by the number of lights. Such a display process for the number of reservations N is executed based on the number of reservations N stored in the special symbol reservation number storage area NA in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b of the RAM 412, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sorting device 35 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5(A), the distribution device 35 includes an introduction port 350, a distribution member 38, a first passage 351, and a second passage 352. In this sorting device 35, the game balls 99 that have entered through the introduction port 350 are directed to the left (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 4 and 5A) and to the right (in FIGS. 4 and 5A) of the distribution member 38. 5(A) in the clockwise direction), the passages are alternately divided into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

The introduction port 350 is a portion that allows game balls to enter the distribution device 35. This introduction port 350 is arranged directly below the life nail (belly button nail) 31H of the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the life nail 31H is introduced into the introduction port 350. The game ball is guided to the life nail 31H mainly from the windmill 31F by the road nail 31M. Further, above the life nail 31H, there is provided a guiding part 31E that guides the game ball that has fallen onto the stage 31S through the warp port 31W provided on the left side of the game board 31 to the life nail 31H. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen onto the stage 31S is also guided to the life nail 31H. Here, the windmill 31F and the warp port 31W are provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the game balls sent out to the game board 31 are operated on the left side of the game board 31 by operating the firing handle 22 so that the game balls pass on the left side of the game board 31. Game balls can be introduced into the sorting device 35 via 350. In addition, in the game machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated so that the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, so-called right-handed hitting, the game ball is placed in the variable prize opening 316b. The life nail 31H is provided with a nail to prevent the game balls from gathering, and in the case of right-handed hitting, the game balls cannot be expected to be introduced from the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35. Therefore, it is easier to receive a jackpot lottery by using the sorting device 35 than by playing right-handed, and the playing state where left-handed is more advantageous for the player compared to right-handed (in this embodiment, mode A to mode C described later) (See FIG. 13(B))), players are encouraged to play the game by hitting left-handed.

The distribution member 38 distributes the game balls introduced from the introduction port 350 into the first passage 351 or the second passage 352. The first passage 351 is open downward, and the game balls sorted into the first passage 351 are released in the direction toward the left first starting port 314L provided directly below the first passage 351. The second passage 352 is open downward, and the game balls sorted into the second passage 352 are released in the direction toward the right first starting port 314R provided directly below the second passage 352.

As shown in FIGS. 5(A) and 5(B), the distribution member 38 includes a rotating shaft 381, a partition piece 382, a ball receiving guide piece 383, and an eccentric portion 384. In the distribution member 38, the partition piece 382, the ball receiving guide piece 383, and the eccentric part 384 rotate integrally about the rotating shaft 381. The partition piece 382 extends from the center of the ball receiving guide piece 383 perpendicularly to the ball receiving guiding piece 383 . The ball guide piece 383 has a left ball guide piece 385 on the left side of the partition piece 382 and a right ball guide piece 386 on the right side of the partition piece 382.

The eccentric portion 384 changes the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 and includes a moving member 387 and a housing portion 388 that accommodates the moving member 387. The moving member 387 is, for example, a sphere, a cylinder, or the like, and moves the housing section 388 from side to side depending on the attitude of the distribution member 38 . When the distribution member 38 is in a right-inclined posture in which the partition piece 382 is inclined to the right with respect to the vertical direction (the state shown by the solid line in FIGS. 5(A) and 5(B)), the moving member 387 is moved to the accommodating portion 388. The center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentrically shifted to the right side of the center by the moving member 387. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the rightward tilted posture. On the other hand, when the distributing member 38 is in a left-tilt position in which the partition piece 382 is tilted to the left with respect to the vertical direction (the state indicated by the imaginary line in FIGS. 5(A) and 5(B)), the moving member 387 is It is located on the left side of the storage section 388, and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the left side of the center. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the left tilted posture.

In such a distribution member 38, the game balls 99 entered into the distribution device 35 are distributed between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 and between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. It can be accepted somewhere in between. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6(A) and 6(B), when the distribution member 38 is in the rightward tilted position, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guiding piece 385. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6(C) and 6(D), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99 between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, the load of the game ball rotates to the left (counterclockwise) and changes to a left-leaning posture. Thereby, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 is guided to the left side (first passage 351 side) along the left ball receiving guiding piece 385.

As shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B), the game ball 99 guided to the left side along the left ball guide piece 385 falls along the first path 351, and the game ball 99 falls along the first path 351. You can easily win at the left first starting port 314L located directly below. In addition, although the first passage 351 is linear in FIG. It may be. In the case of such a non-linear first passage 351, the left first starting port 314L is located at a position where the game ball passing through the first passage 351 can easily win a prize, depending on the position and shape of the exit of the first passage 351. will be placed in

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(A), when the distribution member 38 is in the left tilted position, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guiding piece 386. Further, as shown in FIG. 8(B), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99, it rotates to the right (clockwise direction) due to the load of the game ball and changes to a rightward tilted posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386 is guided to the right side along the right ball receiving guide piece 386 and falls along the second path 352. At this time, the game ball 99 passes through the first through gate 318. That the game ball 99 has passed through the first through gate 318 is detected by the ball entry sensor 318a (see FIG. 10). As a result, an opportunity is given to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to activate the electric support member 36 (normal electric accessory), and if the lottery result of this normal symbol winning lottery is a win, the electric supporting member 36 is activated. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, and the operating time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, depends on the gaming state (mode) as described later. (See FIGS. 13(B) to 13(D)).

As shown in FIG. 8(B) and FIG. 8(C), the game ball 99 guided to the right side along the right ball guide piece 386 falls along the second passage 352, and falls along the second passage 352. It moves toward the right first starting port 314R located directly below.

Here, the second starting port 315 is arranged between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. This second starting port 315 is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391 formed between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R, and is used to prevent game balls 99 that have fallen into the ball receiving portion 391. enters the second starting port 315. Moreover, a plate-shaped electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory is arranged between the second passage 352 and the right first starting port 314R. This electric support member 36 restricts the winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. an operating position (first position) that supports winning of game balls, and a standby position (first position) that restricts winning of game balls to the second starting port 315 and allows winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R. 2nd position), the game board 31 is moved back and forth through an opening 360 provided in the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 8(C), when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, since the electric support member 36 does not protrude from the game board 31, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is Since it is not restricted by the support member 36, the game ball falling along the second path 352 can easily enter the right first starting opening 314R. Note that the design of the second passage 352 can be changed in the same way as the first passage 351, and the arrangement of the right first starting port 314R can also be changed as appropriate depending on the shape of the second passage 352, etc.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the electric support member 36 protrudes from the game board 31, and the right first starting port 314R is blocked by the opening/closing part 362 of the electric support member 36, thereby restricting the winning of the game ball to the right first starting opening 314R. Further, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 that has fallen along the second path 352 is guided above the ball receiver 391 by the guide portion 363 of the electric support member 36, and then 391. The game ball 99 that has fallen into the ball receiver 391 enters the second starting port 315. In addition, game balls that flow down from above the stage 310 and the electric support member 36 provided below the variable winning device 316 and are received by the electric support member 36 can also win a prize in the second starting port 315. That is, in this embodiment, both the game balls 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are transferred to the second path by one electric support member 36. The ball can be entered into the starting port 315.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9(C), the electric support member 36 is located between the left side of the stage 310 provided below the variable winning device 316 and the upper part of the right first starting port 314R. It is a plate-like member that is placed downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 9(C), a pair of wall portions 361 are provided that protrude above the edge in the width direction. These wall portions 361 function as a guide for guiding the game ball 99 from the upstream end on the right side (upstream side) to the downstream end on the left side (downstream side). A plurality of delay guides 364 (four in this embodiment) are provided in a region on the left side (downstream side) of the central portion of the electric support member 36. The plurality of delay guides 364 extend in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and are formed in an inclined shape with a distal end located on the left side (downstream side) compared to a proximal end. Therefore, the plurality of delay guides 364 (delay parts) move the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) along a meandering path back and forth. Here, if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay guide 364, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining more profit than expected, but this point will be described later.

Note that the configuration of the electric support member 36 can be changed in various ways. For example, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 are arranged in a staggered manner, and the electric support member 36 does not necessarily have to be a plate-like member. Note that typical modifications of the electric support member 36 will be described later as thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

By the way, as mentioned above, the electric support member 36 is configured to support the normal symbol winning that is triggered by the detection of passage of the game ball through the through gates 318 and 319 in the special symbol game state in which the special symbol game is executed. It is activated when the lottery result is a win. In addition, the operating time of the electric support member 36 (the time when the electric support member 36 is not in the standby position, or the time from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the start of return) is when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319. The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is short (for example, 0 .6 seconds), and in modes D and E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is such that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36, while the electric The time during which a game ball that has moved to the support member 36 or a game ball that is guided by the first evacuation guide nail 393 and second evacuation guide nail 394 and received by the electric support member 36 (described later) cannot enter the prize in the second starting port 315 (for example, 0 .6 seconds). In addition, for one or both of the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319, the electric support member 36 may be operated without performing the normal symbol winning lottery when the passage of the game ball is detected.

Here, game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting are distributed to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, and the game balls in the first passage 351 enter the left first starting port 314L, and the game balls enter the left first starting port 314L. The game balls in the second passage 352 fall toward the right first starting port 314R. If the electric support member 36 is not operating, the game ball falling from the second passage 352 will enter the right first starting port 314R, and if the electric support member 36 is operating, it will be second started by the support of the electric support member 36. It is guided to the mouth 315. On the other hand, a game ball that flows down the right side of the sorting device 35, such as when a ball is hit to the right, is not introduced into the sorting device 35 and therefore does not enter the first starting port 314, and does not enter the electric support member. 36, if the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (Mode A to Mode C), the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position before the game ball reaches the second starting port 315. However, the player does not enter the second starting port 315. Specifically, since the electric support member 36 has a plate shape extending between the stage 310 and the right first starting port 314R and has a delay guide 364, the electric support member 36 is moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36. The time it takes for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36 is longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C. Therefore, in modes A to C where the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, the player collects the game balls on the life nail 31H and uses the sorting device 35 to move the game balls to the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315. Left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to win game balls. On the other hand, in mode D and mode E, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer than the time it takes for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 that has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36. Therefore, it is better to allow the game balls to pass through the second through gate 319 and to win the game balls to the second starting port 315 using the electric support member 36, since the sorting device has a possibility that the game balls will enter the first starting port 314. This is more advantageous to the player than using 35. Therefore, in modes D and E where the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, right-handed hitting is encouraged.

By the way, some conventional game machines are equipped with a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting section and a second starting section whose function is different from that of the first starting section. However, when the distribution device alternately distributes game balls to the first starting section and the second starting section, there is a concern that the game becomes monotonous and the interest in the game decreases.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a sorting device 35 that alternately distributes game balls to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, the first passage A first starting port 314 having the same function is provided below at the outlet of each of the passage 351 and the second passage 352. Further, in the sorting device 35, the first through gate 318 is provided only in the second passage 352 of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Then, when the passing of the game ball into the second passage 352 is detected by the through gate 318, the MPU 41 makes a normal determination as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. Therefore, when the game ball is hit to the left to use the sorting device 35, the game ball is guided to the left first starting port 314L by the first passage 351, and the game ball enters the left first starting port 314L. The second passage 352 can bring the game ball into the right first starting port 314R, and the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36 can lead the game ball to the second starting port 315. In addition, when the ball is hit to the right, the game ball does not enter the sorting device 35, and the electric support member 36 is activated when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319. A game ball may be guided to the starting port 315. In this way, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the monotonous one in which game balls are distributed to two types of starting sections (first starting section and second starting section) with different functions, as in conventional gaming machines. Differently, by cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36, it is possible to achieve a plurality of states in which game balls can be placed in the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the game becomes monotonous. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the first starting part is placed in a position where winnings can be made when playing left-handed, while the second starting part is placed on the right side of the game board along with normal electric accessories such as through gates and electric support members. Many of them can be seen placed in. In such a gaming machine, if you hit left-handed, the game ball can land in the first starting part, but the game ball cannot land in the second starting part located on the right side of the game board. When the game ball is hit right, the game ball can land in the second starting part disposed on the right side of the game board, but the game ball does not land in the first starting part. In general, it is more advantageous to win a jackpot in a jackpot lottery that is triggered by the winning of a game ball in the second starting part than in winning a prize with a game ball in the first starting part. For example, in a jackpot in a jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the second starting part, there is a high ratio of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot with a large number of rounds in a jackpot game. In a gaming machine where the function of the starting part that allows winning is different depending on whether the player is left-handed or right-handed, the gaming conditions include low jackpot winning probability and normal symbol winning probability variation, special symbol variation time, and regular symbol variation. It has a normal mode which takes a long time and a time-saving probability variable mode in which the jackpot winning probability and the normal symbol winning probability are high and the special symbol fluctuation time and the regular symbol fluctuation time are short. In addition, in the normal mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is low and the normal symbol fluctuation time is long, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory is short in the case of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the normal mode, the support time of the normal electric accessory is short when the game ball enters the second starting part triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate, and the support of the normal electric accessory is performed infrequently. It can only be received by In other words, in the normal mode, even if you play right-handed, you will not only receive almost no benefit from the support of normal electric accessories, but also you cannot expect the game ball to enter the first starting part. It is a good idea to do so. On the other hand, in the time probability variable mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is high and the regular symbol fluctuation time is short, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory is long in the case of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the time-saving variable probability mode, the support time of the normal electric accessory is long, and the support of the normal electric accessory is increased when the game ball enters the second starting section triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate. You can receive it frequently. That is, in the time-saving probability variable mode, it is better to make the game ball win in the second starting part by hitting the right hand, compared to making the game ball win in the first starting part by hitting the left. In other words, by hitting left in the normal mode, you can land the game ball in the first starting part and play the first special figure game, while in the time-saving fixed variable mode, you can play the second special figure game by hitting right. The profit for the player is maximized. In addition to the time-saving variable mode, some gaming machines have a so-called latent variable mode in which the variable probability mode is not clearly indicated. In the latent probability variable mode, the probability of winning a jackpot is high as in the time saving probability variable mode, but in general, support for ordinary electric accessories is the same as in the normal mode. That is, in the latent probability variable mode, the variation time of the normal symbol for the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the winning probability of the normal electric accessory actuation in the normal symbol lottery is low, so the second Normally, electric accessory support for winning game balls into the starting part can only be received for a short time and infrequently. Therefore, in the latent probability mode, if you hit right-handed, you can hardly expect to win the second starting part, so by hitting the game ball left-handed and placing the game ball in the first starting part, as in the normal mode, Playing special figure games is encouraged. Not only in the normal mode and the latent probability variable mode, but also in game states where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is preferable to eliminate the advantages of right-handed hitting, such as making it difficult to receive support from normal electric accessories.

On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 is equipped with the sorting device 35, it is not clearly indicated that the special figure gaming state is the probability variable mode (high probability mode) like the conventional gaming machine, and left-handed playing is encouraged. In mode C, the electric support member 36 operates for a short time when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 as well, it is preferable to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 315 even if the electric support member 36 is activated by right-handed hitting in mode C. In the gaming machine 10, a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay parts are provided on the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory. Here, if the electric support member 36 is not provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay parts, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) in a straight path. move in the direction of On the other hand, when the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay guide 364 as in the present embodiment, the game balls 99 of the electric support member 36 meander from the right side (upstream side) to the left side ( downstream). Therefore, by providing the delay guide 364 in the electric support member 36, the movement distance in the electric support member 36 becomes larger, and the residence time of the game balls 99 in the electric support member 36 can be secured for a longer time. The time required for the game ball to reach the second starting port 315 can be made longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in mode C. As a result, when the special figure game state is the above-mentioned mode C, or when it is in modes A and B in which left-handed hitting is encouraged like mode C, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short. In this case, even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 due to a player hitting right, etc., the electric support member 36 will be closed before the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Since the game returns to the standby state, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 315. This makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 315 when the player uses a hitting method (right-handed hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed hitting). That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is possible to encourage the player to actively play left-handed hitting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5(A), above the electric support member 36, a plurality of nails are connected between the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the distribution device 35. A first retreat guide nail 393 and a second retreat guide nail 394 (retreat guide portion) are provided. These retreat guiding nails 393, 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36, which is the right area of the sorting device 35, in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35. That is, the retreat guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394 are provided, the game ball flowing down from above can be received at a position away from the second starting port 315 in the electric support member 36, and the game ball can It is possible to secure a long time until the second starting port 315 is reached. As a result, similarly to the case where the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay guide 364, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the second movement starting port 315 in a short period of time, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to receive support from the electric support member 36 in the event that the ball is hit in a way that is not recommended. In addition, in the game machine 10, since a large number of nails are driven into the game board 31, it is possible to provide a first retreat guide nail 393 and a second retreat guide nail 394 when driving these nails. Become. Therefore, while suppressing the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide part (the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394), when the electric support member 36 operates for a short time, It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36.

Note that, as the retraction guide portion, instead of the retraction guide nails 393 and 394, it is also possible to adopt a block-shaped member or the like formed by resin molding, metal processing, a combination thereof, or the like.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gates 318 and 319 in mode D and mode E is a win, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). For example, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 has a short distance from the first through gate 318 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 is operated for a short time as in mode C, However, since it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 315, a prize can be won in the second starting port 315 even in mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 319 or the game ball that has been launched before or after the game ball has a long distance from the second through gate 319 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, but the electric support Since the operating time of the member 36 is long, even if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay part 364, the second starting port 315 is entered. When the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time in this way, not only game balls that pass through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and fall, but also game balls that flow down the right side area of the sorting device 35. A game ball that has fallen onto the stage 310 below the variable prize opening 316b can be guided to the second starting opening 315 by the electric support member 36. However, the game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 are in a game state in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time because the game balls are distributed alternately to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 as described above. In mode D and mode E, left-handed hitting cannot fully benefit from the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode D and mode E, which are gaming states in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time, the player can move the electric support member 36 by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the game board 31. 36, it is encouraged to operate the firing handle 22 in a right-handed manner.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. Note that when the game balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 10, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage level to a control device and a driving means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs main control of games in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Furthermore, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Furthermore, part or all of the processing executed by the main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the main display section 37, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42. Then, the MPU 41 selects the general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, and the second starting opening based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered the opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the through gates 318 and 319. Moreover, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command and a shift command to the audio lamp control device 5.

The variable pattern command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of the variable display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When starting the symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 and the main display section 37, the variation pattern command executes the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 22 based on information stored in the special symbol holding storage area 412b described later. It is set in step S1808. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 only of the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

The shift command is a voice lamp control that indicates that the special figure success/failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 has shifted when the number of pending numbers N decreases. This is a command to notify the device 5. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process in FIG.

Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the changed clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs the main timer assignment described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Assume that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operation clock for the control main body in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery, etc. will be explained. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412 and the counter information stored in the special figure pending storage area 412b to execute the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used when determining the type of loss. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the symbol display section 341. included. Furthermore, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal symbol per random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory, and a normal symbol per random number counter C4 used for setting the initial value of the normal symbol per random number counter C4. A normal symbol per initial value counter CIN2 is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 738, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the counter value (random value) at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b. On the other hand, when the counter value (random value) is acquired, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is set as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is determined by the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411 in low probability modes (Mode A, Mode B, and Mode D described below) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot. (See FIG. 13(B))), and a high probability mode (Mode C and Mode E (see FIG. 13(B)) to be described later) that have a high probability of winning a jackpot. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode validity table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode validity table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B), in the low probability modes (mode A, mode B, and mode D), the number of random numbers (0 to 2), and the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1/246.3). On the other hand, in the high probability mode (mode C and mode E), the number of counter values (random values) for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 30 (0 to 29), and the jackpot probability is 10 in the low probability mode. It is 30/739 (= about 1/24.6), which is twice as much. Here, in the low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table, the three random numbers (0 to 3) for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but it is also possible that they are not common. In addition, the random numbers that result in a jackpot need not be continuous values, and may be partially or entirely discrete values. Note that if the counter value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the counter value (random value) at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is individually set for each jackpot of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game according to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. ing. That is, in the gaming machine 10, there is a jackpot when the game ball enters the first starting port 314 (first special jackpot), and a jackpot when the game ball enters the second starting port 315 (second special chart jackpot). ) and the distribution of the jackpot type is different. Here, FIG. 12(C) and FIG. 12(D) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 12(C), in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol game triggered by winning in the first starting hole 314, the jackpot types are 2R probability variable jackpot (first determination result) and 2R normal jackpot ( (second determination result). The number of random numbers that result in a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot is 15 from 0 to 14, the number of random numbers that result in a 2R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19, and the random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot. does not exist. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 12(D), in the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol game triggered by winning in the second starting hole 315, 5R probability variable jackpot (first judgment result), 16R probability variable jackpot (first judgment result), 1 judgment result) and 5R normal jackpot (second judgment result). The number of random numbers that result in a 5R variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. Yes, there are no random numbers that result in a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a probability variable jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) in the first special symbol game is 75% (15/20), and probability variation jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot) in the second special symbol game. The probability is 75% (15/20). That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of a variable jackpot is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the distribution of the jackpot type is different between the first special drawing jackpot and the second special drawing jackpot, but the number of rounds played in the jackpot game is higher for the second special drawing jackpot than for the first special drawing jackpot. The second special drawing jackpot is more advantageous for the player in terms of the number of rounds played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting port 314, which is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game, and the game ball enters the second starting port 315, which is an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game. An individual jackpot type distribution table is set for each of the winnings, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315. However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop fixed-change machine, but may also be configured as a gaming machine with specifications different from the loop fixed-change machine, such as a so-called limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixed machine, etc. . Note that examples in which the gaming machine 10 is applied to a limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a type-two type mixing machine will be described later as third to sixth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 28 to 50. .

Then, based on the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot (second determination result), 2R probability change It is determined whether it is a jackpot (first judgment result), a 5R probability variable jackpot (first judgment result), a 5R normal jackpot (second judgment result), a 16R probability variation jackpot (first judgment result), or a loss. Specifically, for a winning in the first starting port 314, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a loss, and then enters the winning into the second starting port 315. Regarding winnings, it is determined whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a loss.

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning hole 316b is opened is repeated twice. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning hole 316b is opened is repeated five times. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

When the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game state shifts to a mode (game state) according to the jackpot type. Here, FIG. 13(A) is a mode transition table that defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 13(A), when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to mode B after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode C after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the game shifts to mode D after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the game shifts to mode E after the jackpot game ends. That is, since the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot in the first starting opening 314L, 314R is a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R certain variable jackpot (see FIG. 12(C)), In the case of a jackpot, the game shifts to mode B or mode C after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, since the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot when winning a prize on the second starting opening 315 is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability varying jackpot (see FIG. 12(D)), In the case of a jackpot, the game shifts to mode D or mode E after the jackpot game ends.

Here, FIG. 13(B) shows the mode types (modes A to mode E) in the special pattern game state in which the special symbols change due to the landing of game balls into the starting ports 314L, 314R, and 315 in the gaming machine 10. This is a mode data table that defines the contents.

Mode A is a mode that is entered when the upper limit number of special symbol games is completed in mode B or mode D, which is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times described below, that is, when the time-saving mode ends. However, among modes A to E, this is the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the gaming state becomes mode A also when the contents of the RAM 412 are cleared when the main power is turned on. Note that if the contents of the RAM 412 are not cleared when the main power is turned on, the gaming state becomes the gaming state stored in the RAM 412 when the main power is turned off.

Mode A (first gaming state) is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). be exposed. Moreover, mode A is a non-time saving mode in which there is no shortening (time saving) of the variable display time of the normal symbols, and the variable display time of the normal symbols is the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 passes the position of the electric support member 36, the normal symbol is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery becomes a win. Even if the electric support member 36 operates, winning at the second starting port 315 cannot be expected due to the support of the electric support member 36. Furthermore, mode A is a low probability per normal symbol mode in which a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a normal symbol low probability win/fail table in which the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win is low. Therefore, in mode A, except for irregular cases such as when a game ball accidentally passes through the second passage 352 at the timing of the operation of the electric support member 36, the first special figure game is executed, and the second special figure game is executed. is not actually executed.

Here, FIG. 13(C) shows an example of a normal symbol low probability correct/fail table. In the normal symbol low probability correctness table shown in FIG. 13(C), one counter value ( 199) corresponds to a winning lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery, and the remaining 199 counter values (0 to 198) correspond to a losing lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol low probability win/fail table, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is set to 0.5% (1/200). Therefore, in mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery will be a win is low, and if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery becomes a winning, the second starting port 315 will be transferred to the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. The level of expectation for the winning of game balls is low. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table will be a win is particularly important if there is a clear probability difference between the probability that the lottery result based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table described later will be a win. There is no limit, and the probability that the lottery result will be a win may be 0%, and it is also conceivable that the normal symbol winning lottery is not performed in mode A. In addition, in mode A, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, but when a gaming ball passes through the second through gate 319, a normal symbol winning lottery is not performed. It is also possible to do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13(B), in mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win. As described above, above the electric support member 36, there is a retraction guide nail 393 that guides the game balls flowing down from above the electric support member 36 in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35 (second starting port 315). 394 (see FIGS. 4 and 5(A)). Therefore, in mode A, even if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is affected by the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 31 due to right-handed hitting. is short, it is difficult for the electric support member 36 to support winning into the second starting port 315 in the case of right-handed hitting. In addition to this, since the probability of winning the lottery result in the above-mentioned normal symbol winning lottery is low, in mode A, the game ball enters the second starting slot 315 which is distributed to the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. can hardly be expected. Furthermore, when playing right-handed, not only cannot the support of the electric support member 36 be expected, but also the introduction of game balls into the sorting device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode A, the game ball is caused to flow down on the left side of the game board 31 by left-handed hitting, the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35, and the game ball enters the first starting port 314L, 314R to receive a jackpot lottery. This is encouraged.

In this way, in mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is low, and the actuation timing of the electric support member 36 is different from the passing timing of the game ball. Therefore, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode A, most of the jackpot drawings are performed for winning game balls into the first starting openings 314L, 314R, and most of the jackpot types in mode A are 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot. As a result, it is extremely easy to shift from mode A to mode B or mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and there is virtually no shift to mode D or mode E.

Mode B (fourth gaming state) is a mode to which the player enters after the end of the 2R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than mode A. be.

Mode B is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot, similar to mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (A)). . In addition, unlike Mode A, Mode B is a time-saving mode in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened than the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) in the non-time-saving mode. The mode is continued until the maximum number of times the special figure game is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). In other words, mode B is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times in which an upper limit is set on the number of times of time-saving, but is more advantageous than mode A because it is a time-saving mode. Here, the shortened variable display time is set to the time when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can enter the prize in the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, and the first through gate 318 and the electric support member 36 It is set depending on the positional relationship (distance, etc.) with respect to the electric support member 36 and the operating time of the electric support member 36, and is set to be, for example, about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this embodiment, an effect that clearly indicates that it is mode B (time saving mode) may be executed on the effect means such as the symbol display section 341. In this case, the effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of a certain change. Note that in mode B, if the upper limit number of special figure games are played without the jackpot lottery result becoming a jackpot, the mode shifts to mode A.

Furthermore, mode B is a mode in which a normal symbol winning lottery is carried out based on a normal symbol high probability win/fail table in which the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery has a high probability of winning, and in this respect it is also an advantageous mode than mode A. be. Here, FIG. 13(D) shows an example of a normal symbol high probability correct/fail table. In the normal symbol high probability success/failure table shown in FIG. 13(D), 199 (0 to 198) of the counter values (random values) of the normal symbol random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) are the normal symbol per lottery. The remaining one (199) corresponds to a winning lottery result, and the remaining one (199) corresponds to a losing lottery result. In other words, in the normal symbol high probability success/failure table, the counter value (random value) for winning and losing is opposite to the normal symbol low probability success/failure table, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is 99.5. % (199/200). Therefore, in mode B, it can be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win. Note that the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table will be a win does not need to be 99.5%, and may be any other percentage. In addition, in mode B, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, but when a gaming ball passes through the second through gate 319, a normal symbol winning lottery is not performed. It is also possible to do so. In addition, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery may be set to 100%. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode B, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(B), in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the normal symbol winning lottery is won, as in mode A. It is not possible to expect the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 due to the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode B, like mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged.

In this way, in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, so left-handed hitting is encouraged instead of right-handed hitting, but unlike mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is Since the game ball is high, it can be expected that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. Specifically, when game balls are introduced into the distribution device 35 as described above, the game balls are alternately distributed into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. The game balls distributed to the first passage 351 enter the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, the game balls sorted to the second passage 352 pass through the first through gate 318. At this time, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability win/fail table per normal symbol. Therefore, the game ball that has been sorted into the second passage 352 and passed through the first through gate 318 is supported by the electric support member 36 with a high probability (99.5% in this embodiment) and reaches the second starting port 315. Win a prize. In addition, if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a loss, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 enters the right first starting port 314R.

In mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning the game ball to the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning the game ball to the second starting port 315. On the other hand, the probability of winning is 0.25% when the game ball enters the right first starting port 314R. As a result, about half (50.25%) of the jackpots in mode B result in 2R normal jackpots or 2R probability variable jackpots, and after the jackpot games for these jackpots are completed, the game shifts to mode B or mode C. In addition, about half (49.75%) of jackpots in mode B result in 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, or 16R probability variable jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game for 5R normal jackpot, mode D is entered, and 5R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot occur. After the jackpot game for the 16R probability-variable jackpot ends, the game shifts to mode E (see FIG. 13(A)). That is, in mode B, with the support of the electric support member 36, in about half of the special figure games, you can receive a jackpot lottery for winning the game ball to the second starting port 315, so the 5R normal jackpot, which is expected to have a large number of wins, It can be expected to win the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the game shifts to mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, as will be described later. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and after the jackpot game for the advantageous jackpot ends, the player shifts to a mode that is more advantageous than mode B. This mode (gaming state) is more advantageous for the player than mode A in this respect as well.

Mode C (second gaming state) is a mode to which the player transitions after the end of the 2R probability-variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is more advantageous to the player than modes A and B. condition). Mode C is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (B)). , is a mode (gaming state) more advantageous to the player than modes A and B in this respect. Further, mode C is a time-saving mode like mode B, but unlike mode B, the time-saving mode is continued until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. In other words, mode C is a guaranteed jackpot time-saving mode that guarantees a jackpot next time, and is a more advantageous mode (gaming state) than mode B in this respect as well. In addition, in this embodiment, the fact that it is mode C (high probability mode) is not clearly indicated in the presentation by the presentation means such as the symbol display section 341 for special pattern games and jackpot games. That is, mode C is a so-called latent probability variable mode. Of course, in mode C, it is possible to clearly indicate in the presentation means that it is a high probability mode, and similarly to mode B, it may be made clear in the presentation means that it is a time saving mode, suggesting the possibility that it is a variable probability mode. A performance may be performed using a performance means as a chance zone.

Furthermore, in mode C, similar to mode B, the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability win/fail table, but similarly to mode A and mode B, electric support is provided when winning the normal symbol winning lottery. Since the operating time of the member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds), it cannot be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 when the player is right-handed. Therefore, even in mode C, left-handed hitting is encouraged. In addition, in mode C, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, but when a gaming ball passes through the second through gate 319, a normal symbol winning lottery is not performed. It is also possible to do so. In addition, in mode C, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the probability of winning in a normal symbol winning lottery may be set to 100%, and when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode C, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

In this way, in mode C, as in mode A and mode B, left-handed hitting is encouraged because the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, but the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is low. Since the game ball passes through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, it can be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, and in this respect, it is also better than mode A. This is an advantageous mode (gaming state). In mode C, as in mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning the game ball to the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning the game ball to the second starting port 315. This is done with a probability of 0.25% when the game ball enters the right first starting port 314R. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode C and the mode to which the jackpot game will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game are the same as in mode B. That is, in mode C, as in mode B, in about half of the special figure games, you can receive a jackpot lottery for winning the game ball in the second starting hole 315, so you can receive the 5R normal jackpot, which is expected to win a lot, and the 5R jackpot. It can be expected to win the probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends, the game shifts to mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, as will be described later. Therefore, in mode C, unlike mode A and similar to mode B, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player.

Mode D (fourth game state) is a mode to which the player transitions after the end of the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is more advantageous for the player than modes A and B (game state condition). Mode D, like Mode A and Mode B, is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see Figure 12 (A)). will be carried out. Further, like mode B, mode D is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times, and shifts to mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games are played. Furthermore, mode D is performed based on a high probability win/fail table in which the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery has a high probability of being a win, and is similar to mode C in this point as well. In addition, in mode D, the time-saving mode is clearly indicated in the presentation by the presentation means such as the symbol display section 341. In this case, the effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of a certain change.

However, unlike Modes A to Mode C, Mode D has a longer operating time for the electric support member 36 (for example, 6 seconds) when winning a normal symbol lottery, and is more advantageous than Modes A to C in this respect. mode (gaming state). In mode D, since the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, the game balls flowing down the right side area of the sorting device 35 and the game balls falling onto the stage 310 below the variable prize opening 316b are electrically operated. It can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the support member 36 . Therefore, right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to operate the electric support member 36 by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the right side of the game board 31. In addition, in mode D, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when the ball is hit to the right, the game ball almost never enters the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball enters the second starting port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the jackpot in mode D is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability variable jackpot with a high probability (approximately 100%). If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, the mode will shift to mode D after the jackpot game for this jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot, the mode will change after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends. Move to E (see FIG. 13(A)). That is, in mode D, unlike modes A to C as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, and the jackpot lottery is not exclusively available for winning the game ball into the second starting port 315. can. Therefore, in mode D, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is one of the following: 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which have a large number of game balls expected to be acquired. After the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot, the mode shifts to mode D or mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a longer time, so this mode (gaming state) is more advantageous than modes A to C in these respects.

Mode E (third gaming state) is a mode to which the mode shifts after the end of the 5R certain variable jackpot game or the 16R certain variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is the mode that is the most popular among modes A to E. This mode is advantageous for those who are interested. Mode E, like mode C, is a jackpot high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is a high probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (B) ), and it is also a jackpot guarantee time saving mode that guarantees a jackpot next time. In addition, in mode E, it is clearly shown in the performance by the performance means such as the symbol display section 341 that the game is in a variable probability gaming state (high probability mode).

However, in mode E, unlike mode C, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds) when the normal symbol winning lottery is won, as in mode D. Therefore, in mode E, like mode D, right-handed hitting is encouraged. In mode E, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when the ball is hit to the right, the game ball almost never enters the first starting ports 314L, 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball enters the second starting port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode E and the mode to which the jackpot game is transferred after the end of the jackpot game are the same as in mode D. That is, in mode E, since the jackpot lottery is exclusively available for winning the game ball into the second starting hole 315, there is a high probability of winning any of the 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which are expected to have a large number of wins. (approximately 100%) to win.

In addition, it is also possible that the electric support member 36 operates multiple times in response to a win in a single normal symbol winning lottery. For example, in mode D and mode E, the total operating time of the electric support member 36 may be set to 6 seconds by performing an operation of operating the electric support member 36 for 1.2 seconds five times. However, the one-time operation time and number of operations of the electric accessory 36 described above are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operating time of the electric support member 36 in mode D and mode E is not limited to 6 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when a normal jackpot such as the 5R normal jackpot is won in mode E, the mode is changed to mode A, which is a non-time saving mode, or mode B, where the operating time of the electric accessories 36 is short, instead of mode D. It's okay. In these cases, mode D is omitted.

By the way, conventional gaming machines have a time-saving mode in which ordinary electric accessories such as electric support members operate frequently and for a long time, making it easier to win at the second starting slot, and a mode in which ordinary electric accessories such as electric support members operate infrequently and for a short time. Some have a non-time saving mode. In this type of gaming machine, the non-time saving mode is set in the normal game state where the jackpot lottery probability is low, and the time saving mode is set in the variable probability game state where the jackpot lottery probability is high.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the theoretical probability of being able to receive support from normal electric accessories in the time-saving mode is constant, so the gameplay in the time-saving mode is poor, and it is difficult to create new gameplay. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 includes mode A, mode C, and mode E as special figure gaming states. These modes A, C, and E have different expected values of the ball entry ratio in the first starting part and the second starting part. Specifically, in mode A, the ball entry ratio into the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and in mode C, the ball entry ratio between the first starting part and the second starting part is approximately 50%:50%. In mode E, the ball entry ratio to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, there is a new system with improved gameplay based on the three modes A, C, and E in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio in the first starting part and the second starting part are different. It becomes possible to create gameplay.

For example, although the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a loop probability changing machine, conventional loop probability changing machines have two modes: a mode in which the ball entry ratio to the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and a mode in which the ball entering ratio to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. However, in mode C of the game machine 10 of this embodiment, the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 is approximately 50%:50. % mode. On the other hand, in order to enter mode E, which is most advantageous for the player to win a jackpot that gives a large amount of gaming value, typically the first win in mode A causes the player to shift to mode C, which is a high probability mode, and in this mode C, It is necessary to win a jackpot in a jackpot lottery triggered by winning the second starting slot 315, which has a probability of approximately 50%. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to go through the stage of acquiring a jackpot at the second starting port 315 in mode C before shifting to mode E, and there are obstacles to be overcome in order to shift to mode E, which is the most advantageous. This gives the loop probability changing machine a new gameplay feature. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gameplay and interest while suppressing the monotony of the game.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 further includes mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, as special figure gaming states, it becomes easier to create new gaming properties with improved gaming properties. Specifically, as described above, the mode E is typically transferred from the high probability mode Mode C, but also from the low probability modes Mode B and Mode D. That is, there is a possibility that mode B and mode D, which are transferred because the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is normally a jackpot, may be transferred to mode E. Since mode B and mode D are low probability modes, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is lower than mode C, so mode B and mode D are shifted to mode E. requires a higher barrier to overcome than when moving from mode C to mode E. In addition, in mode D, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, whereas in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, so in mode B and mode D, it is easier to enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, the height of the barrier that must be overcome in order to shift to mode E is different between mode B and mode. In this way, by having Mode B and Mode D as special figure game states, the gameplay has multiple barriers (three types of barriers in this embodiment) of different difficulty to be overcome in order to transition to Mode E. It is given to the loop definite change machine. Thereby, it is possible to further improve the gameplay and interest while suppressing the monotony of the game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display on the symbol display section 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-to-reach symbol, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs. Here, reach refers to a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols that indicates winning the jackpot is likely to occur during the period from when the fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display section 341 starts until when the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is fluctuating. Furthermore, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines rough variation types such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. as special figure game effects. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the MPU 41 executes a main process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating a variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines the variation pattern while referring to a low probability mode jackpot variation table, a high probability mode jackpot variation table, or a loss variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 according to the lottery result. Identify the type. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided depending on whether the current gaming state is a low probability mode or a high probability mode, or may be provided individually for each of modes A to E.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the first special symbol display 371, the second special symbol display 372, and the symbol display section 341 of the main display section 37, the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern in the jackpot lottery. A variable pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the audio lamp control device 5. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display section 341 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and performance type displayed in . Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, plays audio from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights up or blinks the illumination section 27. , turn off the lights.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display on the symbol display section 341 based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It turns out. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display section 341 are determined by the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes.

The normal symbol per random number counter C4 is used for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 for a predetermined period of time. This is a loop counter that returns to 0 after the The normal symbol per random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 14, which will be described later, and the counter value (random value) is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Based on this counter value (random value), a normal symbol winning lottery is performed. For the normal symbol winning lottery, the normal symbol should not be displayed fluctuatingly (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 should not be blinking) at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, and the jackpot game should be played. This is carried out every time a game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, provided that it is not being executed and that the electric support member 36 is not operating. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, when the count value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired for the normal winning lottery, the counter value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol. .

The special figure holding area 412b includes a first special figure holding area RE1, a second special figure holding area RE2, a third special figure holding area RE3, a fourth special figure holding area RE4, a fifth special figure holding area RE5, and a sixth special figure holding area RE5. It includes a special figure holding area RE6, a seventh special figure holding area RE7, an eighth special figure holding area RE8, a special figure holding number storage area NA, and a special figure execution area AE.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, the special pattern validity information is stored in any of the first special pattern holding area RE1 to the eighth special pattern holding area RE8. There is no distinction between winning game balls for the first starting port 314 and winning games for the second starting port 315, and they are stored in the order of winning. The special figure success/failure information includes numerical information that is the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are acquired when the game ball enters the starting hole 314, 315. The starting opening information (special drawing information) that can distinguish whether the winning is for the first starting opening 314 or the winning for the second starting opening 315 and the mode when the special drawing winning/falsifying information is acquired. It includes mode information for each type (mode A to mode E).

In addition, corresponding to each of the winnings for the first starting opening 314 and the winnings for the second starting opening 315, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1) etc.) may be provided individually.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is set to any one of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8. It is stored separately. In addition to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game that is executed based on the special figure success/failure information stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8, it is displayed on the symbol display section 341. It is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting port 314, 315, the special figure winning/failing information is the first special figure holding area RE1, the second special figure holding area RE2, the third special figure holding area RE3, and the fourth special figure holding area RE3. They are stored in vacant areas in priority order: special figure holding area RE4, fifth special figure holding area RE5, sixth special figure holding area RE6, seventh special figure holding area RE7, and eighth special figure holding area RE8. In the special figure reservation number storage area NA, the number of the first to eighth special figure reservation areas RE1 to RE8 in which special figure validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number N. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 are used to record the winning history of game balls entering the starting openings 314 and 315. It is possible to hold up to eight pieces of information on whether the special drawings are valid or not in order of winning.

The special figure execution area AE is a memory used to move the special figure validity information stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 when the symbol variation display in the main display section 37 and the symbol display section 341 is started. It is an area. Then, at the start of one first special figure game or second special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information and mode information stored as special figure success/failure information in the special figure execution area AE. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a lottery is performed to allocate the jackpot type based on the starting opening information (special pattern information) stored as the special pattern validity information. In addition, when the special figure validity information of the first special figure holding area RE1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE, priority is given to the special figure validity information of the second special figure holding area RE2 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8, respectively. The area is shifted to the first special figure holding area RE1 to the seventh special figure holding area RE7, which are one level higher in rank. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure winning/falsifying information is stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 in the order of winning, regardless of whether the game ball is won in the first starting port 314 or the game ball is won in the second starting port 315. ~ The special figure execution area is stored in the 8th special figure holding area RE8, and the special figure success/failure information is stored in the winning order without distinction between the winning of the game ball for the first starting opening 314 and the winning of the game ball for the second starting opening 315. By shifting to AE, a special figure game based on the special figure validity information is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is what is called MAX8 in terms of holding and extinguishing the special pattern winning/failing information (execution of the special drawing game).

The normal pattern random number storage area 412c is a normal pattern random number counter C4 that is acquired by the MPU 41 at the timing when the passing of the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensors 318a, 319a when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319. This is a storage area where the counter value (random value) is stored. The counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 for a plurality of normal symbols is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c, and the normal pattern changes at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. The through gate 318 is not displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not flashing), the jackpot game is not being executed, and the electric support member 36 is not operating. , 319, the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is stored. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the jackpot lottery. Further, when the count value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired, the counter value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol fluctuation display and the Execute the performance display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp flashing patterns used in special figure game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 sends commands to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by having the MPU 51 execute processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511. (control signal) to control the display on the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 in accordance with the display on the symbol display section 341. For example, when executing a game performance, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display section 341, audio output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination section 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command are inputted from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp controller 5. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs display variation pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may include a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, as another embodiment, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 can be considered.

Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the motor driver 39c. In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the audio output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, etc. based on commands input from the main control device 4. Furthermore, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output I/F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the game effect executed on the symbol display section 341, the audio output from the speaker 26, the illumination section It is also possible to control the blinking mode of 27.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands input from the main controller 4 such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern and a production type based on the variation pattern command, and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6. Then, the variable display of the main symbol on the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, if the variable pattern command is a jackpot lottery and the lottery result indicates a loss, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the loss is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable pattern command is a jackpot lottery and the lottery result indicates a jackpot, a combination of main symbols according to the jackpot type is displayed. In addition, when the variable pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information regarding the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and stores the information in the RAM 512 when determining the jackpot game production when the jackpot game start command is received. Refer to the stored information regarding the jackpot type.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes variable display of the main symbol and effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command etc. input from the audio lamp control device 5. .

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input/output I/F 62, etc., and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display section 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 contains variable symbols such as the main symbol used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display section 341, a preview effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a miss effect image, and an opening used in the jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as a performance image, an opening/closing performance image, an ending performance image, etc. are stored. Note that the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing variable display and effect display of the main symbol.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 is for paying out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches whether or not to pay out game balls. It also includes a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 stores information in a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set in advance and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, but may be a coin-shaped or stick-shaped storage medium containing an IC chip, for example. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash by inserting cash.

[Launching control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the launch rail 321 by driving the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated. Let it feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and directs the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31 by driving the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation. and fire it. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the firing control IC 81 determines that, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the greater the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the higher the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the firing handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily operate to stop the firing of the game ball. is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball firing mechanism 32 stops firing the game balls. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and gaming in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the firing of the game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his or her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the dispensing control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is in the ON state.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging means that is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge that. In addition, when the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 24. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 performs a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Executes NMI interrupt processing, etc. Note that in this embodiment, descriptions of startup processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing to determine the detection state of a sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, etc. is determined. At this time, if the passing of the game ball is detected by any of the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, sets the counter value to 0. do.

<Step S1003>
In step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal symbol per random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal symbol random number counter C4, and when these counter values reach the maximum value. If so, the corresponding counter value is set to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
The MPU 41 executes a starting winning process associated with winning to the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

The launch control process starts the launch of game balls on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is the process of enabling. On the other hand, the firing control process disables the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes through gate processing. In the through gate process, the MPU 41 monitors whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, the MPU 41 stores data in the regular figure random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. Update the stored information. Note that details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

[Start winning process]
Here, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 15.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the starting opening 314, 315 based on the detection results from the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the starting hole 314, 315 (step S1101: Yes), it moves the process to step S1102, and determines that the game ball has not entered the starting hole 314, 315. Then (step S1101: No), the start winning process is ended and the process moves to step S1005 in FIG. 14.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number N stored in the special symbol reserved number storage area NA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (8 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in FIG. 14. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the special symbol validity information in a vacant reservation area with a high priority among the first special symbol reservation area RE1 to eighth special symbol reservation area RE8 of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in FIG. 14, and the fluctuation type counter that is updated in step S1302 in the main process in FIG. 17, which will be described later. Obtain the counter values with CS1, and transfer those counter values (numeric information) to the empty holding area with the highest priority among the first special drawing holding area RE1 to the eighth special drawing holding area RE8 in the RAM 412 as special drawing validity information. Store as . In addition, the MPU 41 determines whether the current starting prize is for any of the left first starting port 314L, right first starting port 314R, and second starting port 315, based on the detection results from the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra, and 315a. At the same time, the starting port information for the specified starting ports 314, 315 is stored as special pattern validity information in the first special pattern holding area RE1 to the eighth special pattern holding area RE8. Furthermore, the MPU 41 turns on the gaming state (mode A to mode E) of the pending game for which numerical information has been acquired in steps S1912, S1919, S1923, S1928, and S1931 of the gaming state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24, which will be described later. The mode is specified based on the set mode type flag (mode A flag to mode E flag), and the mode information for the specified mode is stored in the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to 8th special figure as special figure propriety information. It is stored in the reservation area RE8.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol validity information before the special symbol validity information acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determining the validity of the jackpot in S1802 or S1803 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, which will be described later. This is confirmed, and a pending command setting process is executed to set a pending command based on the confirmation result. Note that when the process in step S1105 is finished, the start winning process is finished and the process moves to step S1005 in FIG. 14.

[Through gate processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of FIG. 14 will be described. In the through gate processing, it is monitored whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319, a normal symbol hit is stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 is stored.

<Step S1201>
First, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319 based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 317a, 318a. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319 (S1201: Yes), it moves the process to step S1202, and if it determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gates 318, 319 ( S1201: No), the through gate process ends.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the LED lamp of the normal symbol display 373 (blinking). When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36 during the variable display of the normal symbols. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1203.

<Step S1203>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is in operation based on the electric accessory operation flag that is set to ON in step S1508 of the normal electric accessory control process in FIG. 19, which will be described later. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is in operation (S1203: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery while the electric support member 36 is operating. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), the process proceeds to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played. Whether or not a jackpot game is being played is determined based on whether or not the jackpot gaming state flag, which is set to on in step S1907 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 23, is set to on, for example. When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is in progress (S1204: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate processing. That is, during the jackpot game, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the process proceeds to step S1205.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 are stopped during the jackpot game, but the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 are stopped only in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The operation may be stopped, and the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be stopped in the opening and opening/closing execution modes. That is, at the ending, a normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be performed.

<Steps S1205 and S1206>
If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), and the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the MPU 41 sets the random number counter C4 per normal symbol. A counter value (random value) is obtained (step S1205), this counter value (random value) is stored in the regular figure random number storage area 412c (step S1206), and the through gate processing is ended. That is, to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 on the condition that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the electric support member 36 is not in operation, and the jackpot game is not in progress. Obtain a random value and store that random value.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be explained with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of variable games and jackpot games are executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1308 is executed as a periodic processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S1309 to S1311 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1308 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 outputs external output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute processing. For example, if a command such as a variable pattern command, a hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316b, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the MPU 41 determines that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 316b based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, it sets a variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412. This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the main processing. Thereby, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display section 341 to display the number of game balls paid out (balls paid out display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes normal symbol control processing. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area 412c. A winning lottery will be held. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes normal electric accessory control processing. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 for an operation time corresponding to the mode type (mode A to mode E) of the special figure game state. Note that details of the normal electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes special figure game control processing for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the special figure game control process will be described later, but in the special figure game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 14, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1302 and S1311. Based on each value, a variable pattern command indicating the variable display time and the jackpot lottery result is set in the RAM 412, and the first special symbol display 371 and second special symbol display 372 of the main display section 37 display variable patterns. and controls the stop display.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, an opening/closing execution mode is executed to control opening/closing of the opening/closing door 316c. In this opening/closing execution mode, a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning hole 316b is executed multiple times depending on the jackpot type. This allows the player to acquire many game balls in the jackpot game. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening), at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending), at the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the ending) ) etc., set various flags and commands. For example, the MPU 41 sets commands such as a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an open/close execution mode start command, and an open/close execution mode end command in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game, and sets the jackpot game start flag, the jackpot game Controls the on/off of flags such as the end flag, the opening/closing execution mode start flag, and the opening/closing execution mode end flag.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the judgment result of the jackpot lottery in step S1804 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 22, which will be described later. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state and modes A to E when predetermined conditions are met. Note that details of the gaming state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes), the process moves to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that it is not the timing to execute the next main process (step S1309: No), the MPU 41 waits until the timing to execute the next main process arrives, that is, until the timing to execute the next main process. During the remaining time, steps S1309 to S1311 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that it is time to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes).

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, sets the counter value to 0. Make it.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the variation type counter CS1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are set to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1309.

[Normal symbol control processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 17. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric accessory 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. In addition to performing a lottery, it also controls the fluctuating display of normal symbols.

<Steps S1401 and S1402>
First, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. When the counter value (random value) of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 is stored in the ordinary figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the counter value (random value) stored in the ordinary figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes). ) (step S1402), and the process moves to step S1403. On the other hand, when the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1413.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode type is mode A, that is, whether or not the normal symbol winning lottery is to be performed based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)). If the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), that is, if it determines that the normal symbol winning lottery is to be performed based on the normal symbol low probability correctness table (see FIG. 13(C)), The process moves to step S1404. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, one of modes B to E, the MPU 41 selects the normal symbol winning lottery from the normal symbol high probability win/fail table (FIG. 13(D) )), the process moves to step S1407.

<Steps S1404 to S1406>
If it is determined that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the non-time saving mode to the normal symbol fluctuation display counter (step S1404). This counter value defines the variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving mode, and is set as a value corresponding to 30 seconds, for example. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)) (step S1405), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1406). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win based on whether the counter value (random number) stored in the random number storage area 412c is 199 or not.

Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win (step S1406: Yes), the process moves to step S1410, and if it determines that the lottery result is a loss (step S1406) :No), the process moves to step S1411.

<Steps S1407 to S1409>
If it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is one of modes B to E, the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the time saving mode in the normal symbol fluctuation display counter. is set (step S1407). This counter value defines the variable display time of the normal symbol in the time saving mode, and the time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, For example, it is set to about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(D)) (step S1408), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1409). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win based on whether the counter value (random number) stored in the random number storage area 412c is between 0 and 198.

Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win (step S1409: Yes), the process moves to step S1410, and if it determines that the lottery result is a loss (step S1409), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1410. :No), the process moves to step S1411.

<Step S1410>
If it is determined that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win (Yes in step S1406 or step S1409), the MPU 41 sets on the normal symbol winning flag indicating that the lottery result is a win (step S1410). ). The ordinary figure hit flag is referred to in step S1503 of the ordinary electric accessory control process in FIG. 19, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373), further sets the normal symbol variable display flag to on (step S1412), and controls the normal symbol. Finish the process. The normal symbol fluctuation display started here is started when the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter set in step S1404 or step S1407 becomes 0, that is, the normal symbol fluctuation is set according to the mode type. After the display time has elapsed, the image is stopped and displayed in step S1415, which will be described later.

<Step S1413>
If the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 changes the normal pattern fluctuation display time set in step S1404 or step S1407. It is determined whether the value of the counter is 0 (step S1413). If the value of the variable display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the process moves to step S1414, and if the value of the variable display time counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), the process moves to step S1418. .

<Step S1414>
If it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ordinary symbol fluctuation display flag is set to on (step S1414). . The ordinary symbol fluctuation display flag indicates whether or not the ordinary symbol is fluctuating, and is set to ON in step S1412. In other words, when the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter is 0 (step S1414: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation display flag is set to on. , it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbol. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1415 when the common figure fluctuation display flag is set to ON (step S1414: Yes), and when the common figure variation display flag is set to OFF (step S1414: No), the normal diagram control process ends.

<Steps S1415 to S1417>
If the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes) and the normal symbol fluctuation display flag is set to on (step S1414: Yes), it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbol, so the MPU 41 The normal symbol is stopped and displayed by lighting or extinguishing the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 (step S1415). That is, the MPU 41 clearly indicates the lottery result of the normal symbol winning lottery in step S1405 or S1408 by the stop display symbol of the normal symbol. Further, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is changing to OFF (step S1416), and sets the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag to ON (step S1417). The ordinary symbol fluctuation stop flag is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of ordinary symbols has been stopped, and is used to determine whether or not it is the timing to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1501 of the ordinary electric accessory control process, which will be described later. referred to for judgment.

<Step S1418>
If the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), it is not the normal symbol stop display timing, so the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter, and displays the normal symbol. Control processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory control processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal electric accessory control process executed in step S1305 in the main process of FIG. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory for an operating time corresponding to the mode type (modes A to E).

<Step S1501>
First, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation stop flag, which is set to on in step S1417 of the normal symbol control process in FIG. Determine whether it exists or not. If the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and moves the process to step S1503. On the other hand, when the ordinary pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Steps S1502 and S1503>
If the normal pattern variation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal variation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and checks whether the normal pattern hit flag is set to ON or not. is determined (step S1503). The normal symbol winning flag indicates that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, and is set to ON in step S1410 of the normal symbol control process in FIG. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1504 when the flag per common map is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), and when the flag per common map is set to OFF (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1504. The normal electric accessory control process ends.

<Steps S1504 to S1506>
If the normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the mode type is one of modes A to C. When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is one of modes A to C (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a value for short-circuiting the electric support member 36 as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter. A value is set (step S1505), and the process moves to step S1507. The initial value in the case of short-circuit operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode type is not one of modes A to C (step S1504: No), that is, if it is mode D or mode E, the electric support A value for long operation of the member 36 is set (step S1506), and the process moves to step S1507. The initial value in the case of long operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds.

<Steps S1507 and S1508>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 starts operating the electric support member 36, and further sets the electric accessory in operation flag to ON (step S1508). The electric accessory operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation, and is used to determine whether or not to return the electric support member 36 from the operation position to the standby position in step S1511, which will be described later. Referenced.

Here, by starting the operation of the electric support member 36, the electric support member 36 moves to the operating position protruding from the game board 31, and the right first starting port 314R is covered by the electric support member 36 (see FIG. 9). See B). In this state, the game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 are restricted from entering the right first starting opening 314R. On the other hand, game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36. When the game ball released from the second passage 352 is received by the electric support member 36, the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Furthermore, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 can also be received by the electric support member 36.

<Steps S1509 and S1510>
When the ordinary figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter whose initial value is set in step S1505 or S1506 is 0. A judgment is made (step S1509). The electric accessory operation counter indicates the remaining time for the electric support member 36 to operate. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric support member 36 is not operating and is in the standby position. When the counter value of the electric accessory activation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1511. On the other hand, if the counter value of the electric accessory activation counter is not 0 (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the electric accessory activation counter (step S1510), and ends the normal electric accessory control process. do.

<Step S1511>
When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the electric support member 36, which is a normal electric accessory, is not operating, the MPU 41 turns on the electric accessory operation flag. It is determined whether it has been set (step S1511). The electric accessory operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation, and is set to ON in step S1508. In other words, when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory operation flag is set to ON, so that the electric accessory is activated. It is determined whether it is the timing to end the operation of the support member 36, that is, whether it is the timing to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position. If the electric accessory operation flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1512, and if the electric accessory operation flag is set to OFF (step S1511: No), the normal electric accessory control process ends.

<Steps S1512 and S1513>
When the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position (step S1512). That is, the MPU 41 restricts the game ball from entering the second starting port 315. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory in operation flag indicating that the electric support member 36 is in operation to OFF (step S1513), and ends the normal symbol control process.

Here, by returning the electric support member 36 to the standby position, the right first starting port 314R is opened by the electric support member 36 (see FIG. 8(C)). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is allowed to enter the right first starting port 314R, but cannot be received by the electric support member 36. Therefore, the game ball released from the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the second starting port 315. Furthermore, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 cannot be received by the electric support member 36, and entry into the second starting port 315 is restricted.

By the way, in conventional gaming machines, as a starting part that triggers a jackpot lottery for transitioning to a jackpot game, there is a first starting part that allows a game ball to enter without receiving support from an ordinary electric accessory; Some have a second starting part that allows the game ball to enter with the support of an electric accessory. Furthermore, some gaming machines alternately distribute game balls to a first starting section and a second starting section using a distributing device.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game balls are sorted into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the sorting device 35, and the game balls are sorted into the second passage 352 by the sorting device 35. In this case, entry of game balls into the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. Specifically, when the electric support member 36 is not activated and is in the standby position (see FIG. 8(C)), the game balls sorted to the second passage 352 are transferred to the right first starting port 314R. While the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Further, when the electric support member 36 is activated and in the operating position (see FIG. 9(B)), the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R is restricted, while the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Entering game balls is permitted. Further, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, in addition to the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the electric support member 36 also guides the game balls released from the distribution device 35 to the second starting port 315. be able to. In this way, the gaming machine 10 is different from a conventional sorting device that sorts game balls into the first starting hole and the second starting hole. Furthermore, unlike conventional ordinary electric accessories, the electric support member 36 of the gaming machine 10 not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315, but also allows the game balls to be distributed to the second passage 352. At the same time, entry of game balls into the right first starting port 314R is permitted or restricted. Moreover, the game balls in the second passage 352 and the game balls hit right can be guided to the second starting port 315 by one electric support member 36. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate, so that the ball entry ratio between the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 can be changed. As a result, the game machine 10 can reduce the monotony of the game, and provide a game machine with improved interest and new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36. For example, by short-circuiting the electric support member 36 in modes A to mode C, and long-operating it in mode D and mode E (see FIG. 13(B)), mode E is most advantageous to the player, as described above. In order to make the transition to the next step, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a gameplay feature having a plurality of barriers of different difficulty. Further, the electric support member 36 is a plate-like member, and can be easily formed by resin molding or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-described effects can be achieved at low cost with a simple configuration.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described. The special symbol game control process includes controlling the variable display and stop display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 371 or the second special symbol display 372, setting data in the special symbol holding storage area 412b, and managing the number of time reductions. etc., is executed.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game, and if it is playing a jackpot game (step S1601: Yes), it ends the variable game control process and stops playing a jackpot game. If so (step S1601: No), the process moves to step S1602. For example, whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is determined based on a jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the jackpot game and to OFF at the end of the jackpot game.

<Step S1602>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and if the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: Yes), the process moves to step S1603. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1602: No), the process moves to step S1607. For example, whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is set to ON in step S1810 in the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 22, which will be described later, and when the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), It is determined based on whether or not the special symbol variation display flag, which is set to OFF in step S1605, is set to ON.

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time since the start of the variable display of the special symbol has passed the variable display time determined according to the lottery result in the special symbol jackpot lottery, and If it is determined that the time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the process moves to step S1604, and if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1603: No), the corresponding special figure game control process end.

<Steps S1604 to S1606>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the relevant symbol on the special symbol display 371, 372 that is currently displaying the variable among the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372. The symbols corresponding to the lottery results in the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special figure game are stopped and displayed (step S1604). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation displaying flag to OFF (step S1605), and sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, which indicates that the variation of the special symbol has been stopped (step S1606).

<Step S1607>
If the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number N stored in the special symbol reserved number storage area NA of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b is 0. (Step S1607). Here, when the number of reservations N is 0 (step S1607: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special game control process. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not 0 (step S1607: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1608.

<Step S1608>
In step S1608, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing regarding the special symbol validity information stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process in step S1608, it moves the process to step S1609. Note that details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

<Step S1609>
In step S1609, the MPU 41 causes the special symbol displays 371 and 372 to perform a variable display based on the special symbol validity information stored in the special symbol execution area AE, and causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the special symbol validity information. A variation start process is executed to set a variation pattern command for execution, and the special figure game control process is ended. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

[Data setting processing]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1608 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. In the data setting process, the data in the special figure pending storage area 412b of the RAM 412 is updated and the process is executed.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
First, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the special figure reserved number storage area NA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b (step S1701), and further subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the special figure reserved number storage area NA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b. The special figure validity information is moved from RE1 to the special figure execution area AE (step S1702).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure validity information of the second special figure holding area RE2 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 one by one. Specifically, in step S1703, the special figure validity information in the second special figure holding area RE2 is moved to the first special figure holding area RE1, and the special figure validity information in the third special figure holding area RE3 is moved to the second special figure holding area RE3. move the special figure validity information of the fourth special figure holding area RE4 to the third special figure holding area RE3, and move the special figure validity information of the fifth special figure holding area RE5 to the fourth special figure holding area RE4. , move the special figure validity information of the 6th special figure holding area RE6 to the 5th special figure holding area RE5, and move the special figure validity information of the 7th special figure holding area RE7 to the 6th special figure holding area RE6. and moves the special figure validity information of the eighth special figure holding area RE8 to the seventh special figure holding area RE7.

<Step S1704>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the special symbol validity information of the first to eighth special symbol reservation areas RE1 to RE8 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1704 is then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of pending symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341, etc. will be changed. When the process of step S1704 is finished, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to the special symbol fluctuation start process of step S1609 in FIG. 20.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, an example of the special figure fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1609 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
First, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is mode C or mode E at the time of acquisition of the winning/falsifying information based on the mode information in the special symbol winning/failing information stored in the special drawing execution area AE of the special drawing holding storage area 412b of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not (step S1801). Here, in mode C and mode E, the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the special pattern winning/failure information stored in the special drawing execution area AE is determined to be a jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning/failure table. This is a mode in which it is determined whether the values match or not (see FIGS. 12(B) and 13(B)). That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether the mode is such that the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 12(B)). When the special figure game state is mode C or mode E (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a propriety determination based on the high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 12(B)) (step S1802). On the other hand, if the gaming state is not mode C or mode E (step S1801: No), that is, if the gaming state is mode A, mode B, or mode D, based on the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 12(A)). A determination is made as to whether or not it is correct (step S1803).

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
In step S1804, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a jackpot. When the result of the validity determination is a jackpot (step S1804: Yes), the MPU 41 calculates the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 included as numerical information in the special figure validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the special figure. The jackpot type is sorted based on the starting opening information (special figure information) included in the win/fail information, and the process moves to step S1806. For example, if the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the first starting opening (first special figure), depending on the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, it will be either a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot. Sort the jackpot type. In addition, if the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the second starting opening (second special figure), depending on the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probable variable jackpot, and 16R probable variable jackpot. Sort the jackpot type into one of the following. On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination is not a jackpot (step S1804: No), that is, if the lottery result is a loss, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1806 without distributing the jackpot type (step S1805).

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 executes a lottery result flag setting process to set a lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, the judgment of success or failure in step S1802 or S1803, and the result of sorting the jackpot type in step S1805. Execute. In this lottery result flag setting process, the 2R regular jackpot flag is set when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R regular jackpot, the 2R regular jackpot flag is set when the lottery result is a 2R regular jackpot, and the 2R regular jackpot flag is set when the lottery result is a 5R regular jackpot. The normal jackpot flag is set when it is a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and a loss flag is set when it is a loss. Here, the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag are flags that indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot and also indicate the type of jackpot. In the game state transition process, it is referenced when the game state is transferred from the jackpot game state to mode B to mode E after the jackpot game ends, and is set to off when the game state is shifted to the target mode after the jackpot game ends. Ru. Further, the loss flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, and is set to OFF in step S1813, which will be described later. In this step S1806, when setting the lottery result flag, the stop display symbols of the special symbol displays 371 and 372 of the main display section 37 are also set according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41 converts the variation pattern indicating the variable display time of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 371 and 372 to the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game. Determined based on the counter value of CS1. Then, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command in the RAM 412 based on the variation pattern determined in step S1807 (step S1808). This variable pattern command may include a lottery result in a jackpot lottery for the special symbol game. Of course, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery may be set as a separate command from the variable pattern command without being included in the variable pattern command. Note that the variation pattern command set in step S1808 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1301 (see FIG. 17) of the next main process executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display a symbol variation based on the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1809 and S1810>
When the variation pattern is set, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 371 and 372 (step S1809), and sets the special symbol variation display flag to ON (step S1810). The special symbol whose variable display has started is stopped after the variable display time (variable pattern) set in step S1807 has elapsed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20 (step S1603 of FIG. 20: Yes and S1604). At this time, the special symbol stops at the stop display symbol set in step S1806 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

<Step S1811>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag, which is set to on in S1917 or S1926 in the gaming state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24, which will be described later, is set to on, If set (Step S1811: Yes), the process moves to Step S1812, and if the time saving flag is set to OFF (Step S1811: No), the special symbol fluctuation start process is ended.

<Step S1812>
If the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the disconnection flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes). If the failure flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), that is, if the result of the validity determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a failure, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813. On the other hand, if the losing flag is set to OFF (step S1812: No), that is, if the result of the success/failure determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817.

<Steps S1813 to S1816>
When the losing flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the losing flag to OFF (step S1813), and also performs S1917 or S1926 in the gaming state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24, which will be described later. The counter value of the time-saving counter that is set when the time-saving flag that is set to on is set to on is subtracted by 1 (step S1814), and it is determined whether the counter value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0. (Step S1815). Note that the counter value of the time saving counter indicates the remaining number of time saving times. If the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if the remaining number of time saving times is 0 and it is necessary to end the time saving mode, the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to ON. (Step S1816), the process moves to step S1817. The time saving end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1909 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 23 in order to determine whether to end the time saving mode. On the other hand, when the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), the MPU 41 ends the special symbol fluctuation start process.

<Step S1817>
The MPU 41 sets the time saving flag when the losing flag is set to OFF (step S1812: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or when the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1816). is set to OFF (step S1817), and the special symbol fluctuation start process ends.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, the game state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. In the gaming state transition process, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state is shifted from the special pattern gaming state consisting of modes A to mode E to the jackpot gaming state including the opening/closing execution mode, and in the jackpot gaming state. After the end of the jackpot game, a process is executed to transition from the jackpot game state to one of the special figure game states modes B to E, depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state ( (See FIG. 13(A)). In addition, in the game state transition process, after performing the upper limit number of special figure games in mode B or mode D of the special figure game state, a process of shifting to mode A is executed (see FIG. 13(A)). Note that the details of modes A to E have already been explained, so the explanation of modes A to E will be omitted here.

<Steps S1901 and S1902>
First, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop flag, which is set to ON in step S1606 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is determined whether it is the timing to shift the gaming state to another gaming state. When the MPU 41 determines that the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1902), and moves the process to step S1903. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1914.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the variable display of the special symbol whose variable display has been stopped is a jackpot. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. Whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not is determined by the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation, which are set to ON in step S1806 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. The determination is made based on whether any of the jackpot flags is set on.

When the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is a jackpot (step S1903: Yes), the process moves to step S1904, and when it determines that the lottery result is not a jackpot (a loss) (step S1903: No), The process moves to step S1909.

<Steps S1904 and S1905>
In step S1904, the MPU 41 determines whether a time saving flag, which is set to on in step S1917 or S1926, which will be described later, is set on. The time saving flag indicates that the time saving mode is limited to the number of times. If the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to on (step S1904: Yes), that is, if it is a jackpot in mode B or mode D, the MPU 41 turns off the time saving flag to end the limited time saving mode. (step S1905), and the process moves to step S1906. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to OFF (step S1904: No), that is, when it is a jackpot in mode A, mode C, or mode E, the process moves to step S1906.

<Steps S1906 and S1907>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, and further sets the jackpot gaming state flag to ON (step S1907). The jackpot game status flag indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and is referenced, for example, in step S1204 in the through gate process in FIG. 16 to determine whether a jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908), and sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908). The mode type flag indicates which mode from mode A to mode E is the mode type in the special figure game state, and in this step S1908, it is set to on when transitioning to the jackpot game state. Set the current mode type flag to off.

Note that the mode type flags include a mode A flag that is set on in step S1912 and indicates mode A, a mode B flag that is set on in step S1919 and indicates mode B, and a mode B flag that is set on in step S1919 and indicates mode B. A mode C flag is set on and indicates mode C, a mode D flag is set on in step S1928 and indicates mode D (see FIG. 24), and a mode D flag is set on in step S1931 and indicates mode D. It also includes a mode E flag (see FIG. 24) indicating that it is mode E.

<Step S1909>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving end flag, which is set to on in step S1816 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, is set to on. is determined (step S1909). The time saving end flag indicates that the upper limit number of special symbol games have been executed in the limited time saving mode (the remaining number of time saving times is 0), and is a flag for ending the time saving mode.

When the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1910. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to OFF (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without transitioning to mode A.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If it is determined that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to OFF (step S1910). Then, the MPU 41 shifts the mode type from mode B or mode D, which is a time saving mode, to mode A (step S1911). At this time, the MPU 41 sets the mode A flag to ON (step S1912), and sets the mode B flag or mode D flag indicating the mode before shifting to mode A to OFF (step S1913), and Finish the migration process.

<Steps S1914 and S1915>
In step S1914, when the MPU 41 determines that the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), it is set to on in the jackpot game control process of step S1307 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game end flag is set on, that is, whether or not it is the timing to shift to one of modes B to E as the jackpot game ends.

When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes), it sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S1915), and moves the process to step S1916. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1914: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without transitioning to mode B to mode E.

<Step S1916>
In step S1916, the MPU 41 determines whether the 2R normal jackpot flag, which is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the type of the finished jackpot game is a 2R normal jackpot. If the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1916: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1917, and if the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1916: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1917. The process moves to step S1921.

<Steps S1917 to S1920>
In step S1917, the MPU 41 turns on a time saving flag indicating that the time saving mode is limited to the number of times. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit number of time saving times as a time saving counter. The number of time saving times is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode B (step S1918) and sets the mode B flag to ON (step S1919). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1920), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S1921>
In step S1921, the MPU 41 determines whether the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the type of the finished jackpot game is a 2R probability variable jackpot. If the 2R probability-variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1921: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1922, and if the 2R probability-variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1921: No), the process proceeds to step S1922. The process moves to step S1925 in FIG.

<Steps S1922 to S1924>
In step S1922, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode C, and further sets the mode C flag to ON (step S1923). Then, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S1924), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S1925>
In step S1925 shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 determines whether the 5R normal jackpot flag, which is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 22, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the type of the finished jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. If the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1925: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1926, and if the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1925: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1926. The process moves to step S1930.

<Steps S1926 to S1929>
In step S1926, the MPU 41 turns on a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving mode is limited to the number of times. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit number of time saving times as a time saving counter. The number of time saving times is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode D (step S1927) and sets the mode D flag to ON (step S1928). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1929), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S1930 to S1932>
In step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode E and further sets the mode E flag to ON. That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes) and all of the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, and 5R normal jackpot flag are set to OFF (steps S1916, S1921, and S1925 (No), it can be determined that either the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON. Therefore, in step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E, which is the destination mode after the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot game and the 16R probability variable jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag set to OFF (step S1932), and ends the game state transition process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S2001), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), a counter update process (step S2003), and a command determination process (step S2002). S2004), special figure game performance processing (step S2005), and jackpot game performance processing (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
In the operation detection process of step S2001, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the operation button 20, and executes a process for sequentially updating, for example, the history of the past three operations. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be determined whether or not there is.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
In the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2002, the MPU 51 sets an operation pattern flag according to the operation state of the operation button 20 based on the operation history of the past three times, for example. The operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined based on this operation pattern flag. The operation states include a start state of operation on the operation button 20, a continued state of operation on the operation button 20, an end state of operation on the operation button 20, and a non-operation state in which the operation button 20 is not operated.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process of step S2003, the MPU 51 updates the production type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the performance type counter, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuating display counter is for measuring the fluctuating display time of decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the fluctuating display counter is set to 0 when the remaining fluctuating display time becomes 0. Set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the decorative symbols are being varied, that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of step S2004, the MPU 51 determines the command received from the main controller 4, and executes the process corresponding to the command. For example, commands received from the main controller 4 include a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, and the like. Commands other than these commands may be output from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp controller 5, but a description of these commands will be omitted.

The variable pattern command is a command that indicates the variable display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is executed in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 22 based on the information stored in the special symbol holding storage area 412b when starting the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol displays 371, 372. It is set in step S1808. When receiving the variable pattern command, the MPU 51 determines the special figure game performance and jackpot game performance to be executed by the symbol display section 341 etc. in accordance with the content specified by the variable pattern command.

The reservation command is a command that indicates, when the reservation number N stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the fluctuation pattern, and the reservation number N. The reservation command is set in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 15 based on the information stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b when the number of reservations N increases.

The shift command is a command that indicates that when the number of reservations N decreases, the special symbol success/failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol retention area RE1 to the eighth special symbol retention area RE8 has shifted. be. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process in FIG.

[Special figure game production processing]
In the special figure game performance processing in step S2005, in the special figure game, for example, the special figure game performance determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. Let it run.

[Jackpot game performance processing]
In the jackpot game performance process of step S2006, the symbol display section 341 displays the jackpot game performance (opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance, and ending performance) determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process in the jackpot game, for example. The speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. are made to execute the process.

As explained above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the conventional gaming machine is equipped with a sorting device that allocates game balls to a first starting section and a second starting section whose function is different from the first starting section. Unlike the machine, a first starting port 314 having the same function is arranged below the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Furthermore, although the game machine 10 is provided with a normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) as in conventional game machines, this electric support member 36 is located downstream of the stage 310 where game balls are collected when playing right-handed. It extends continuously between the side and the lower part of the exit of the game ball of the second passage 352 (above the right first starting port 314R), and is formed in a plate shape having a delay part 364. As a result, the electric support member 36 allows the game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 and distributed to the second passage 352 when playing left-handed to enter the second starting port 315, and also allows the game balls to enter the second starting port 315 when playing right-handed. The game balls collected at 310 can be entered into a second starting port 315 to win a prize. In other words, the electric support member 36 allows or restricts the winning of game balls into the second starting port 315 depending on whether or not it is activated, and at the same time restricts or restricts the winning of game balls into the right first starting port 314R. Allow. In other words, the electric support member 36 is different from the ordinary electric accessories of conventional gaming machines, and by restricting the winning of game balls to the second starting port 315, the electric supporting member 36 prevents the winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R. On the other hand, by allowing the game ball to enter the second starting port 315, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a normal mode (mode A), a latent probability variable mode (mode C), and a time-saving probability variable mode (mode E), which are adopted in conventional gaming machines, as special figure gaming states. By working together with the device 35 and the electric support member 36, the gameplay in the latent probability variable mode (mode C) is improved.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, left-handed batting is encouraged in mode A and mode C, and when the left-handed batting is performed, game balls enter the sorting device 35, and these game balls enter the first passage 351. and the second passage 352 alternately. On the other hand, in mode E, right-handed hitting is encouraged, and by performing right-handed hitting, you can receive support from the electric support member 36 for a long time and with high frequency, and as a second special figure game until the transition to the jackpot game state. Only the special figure game is executed. In other words, in mode E, the rate of balls entering the second starting port 315 is 100%, similar to the time-saving variable probability mode of conventional gaming machines in which the high probability mode is executed by right-handed ball hitting without using the distribution device 35. It is.

In mode A, the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 enter the left first starting port 314L. Moreover, since mode A is not the time saving mode, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 enter the right first starting port 314R before the electric support member 36 operates. That is, in mode A, although the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, the game balls introduced into the distribution device 35 are (first starting port 314L or right first starting port 314R). Therefore, in mode A, the ratio of balls entering the first starting port 314 is 100%, substantially similar to the normal mode of conventional gaming machines.

On the other hand, in mode C, as in mode A, left-handed batting is encouraged, and when the left-handed batting is performed, game balls enter the sorting device 35, and those game balls enter the first passage 351. When game balls are alternately distributed to the second passage 352 and distributed to the first passage 351, the game balls enter the left first starting port 314L. Moreover, unlike mode A, mode C is a time-saving mode, so the electric support member 36 operates to restrict the entry of game balls distributed to the second passage 352 into the right first starting port 314R. As a result, the second starting port 315 wins. That is, in mode C, by playing left-handed, the game ball is distributed alternately to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 by the sorting device 35. Therefore, although mode C is a latent probability variable mode, game balls are distributed alternately to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315, and the first starting port (left first starting port 314L) The ball entry ratio between the starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50% unless the result of the normal lottery is a loss.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different in modes A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode C (expected value is 50%). It has three gaming states: mode E (expected value is 100%); Therefore, it is possible to create a new game experience with improved playability based on the three game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. In particular, since the gaming machine 10 is configured as MAX 8, the reservation is cleared in the order of winnings. There is a probability of 1/2 that the jackpot type will be distributed by winning in the second starting port 315, and a probability of 1/2 is that the jackpot type will be distributed by winning in the first starting port 314. can receive.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game balls sorted to the second passage 352 enter the right first starting port 314R in mode A, and enter the second starting port 315 in mode C. Ball. This is because the game balls sorted into the second passage 352 are allowed to enter the right first starting port 314R when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position where it is not in operation. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted, and when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position where it operates, the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R is restricted, while the second starting port 315 is restricted. This is achieved by arranging the electric support member 36 to allow the game ball to enter the mouth 315, and by making the operating time of the electric support member 36 different between modes A and C. . In this way, the electric support member 36 not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315, but also allows game balls distributed to the second passage 352 to enter the right first starting port 314R. Allow or restrict the entry of game balls at the same time. In other words, by the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 working together, the ratio of game balls entering the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 can be changed in mode A and mode C. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new gameplay characteristics depending on the manner in which the operation of the electric support member 36 is controlled.

In the game machine 10, the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 315, so that the player can use the Even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 due to a right-handed hit, etc., the delay guide 364 can ensure a long time until the game ball reaches the second starting port 315. As a result, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 can be prevented from reaching the second starting port 315 from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 until the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position, so a game in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. By eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in this state, it is possible to force the player to actively play left-handed.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In addition, in other embodiments described below, the same configurations and steps similar to those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and step numbers. The explanation below will be omitted. Note that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing procedure of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second to Sixth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop probability changing machine and the special symbol game is executed in any of the five gaming states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in the second to sixth embodiments, the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are different from the above-described first embodiment. The second to sixth embodiments will be individually described below.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a special symbol game is executed in one of three gaming states: mode A, mode C, and mode E. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the special figure game state does not include mode B and mode D, which are time saving modes limited to the number of times. Furthermore, since the special figure game state is composed of three modes, Mode A to Mode C, the mode transition is also different from the above-described first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 26(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 26(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 26(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 26(A) is the same as that in the first embodiment described above. That is, in this embodiment as well, the jackpot in the first special figure game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 is divided into either the 2R guaranteed variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, and the jackpot due to winning in the second starting opening 315 The jackpot in the 2-special figure game is divided into one of 5R probability-variable jackpot, 16R probability-variable jackpot, and 5R regular jackpot. Of course, the distribution of the jackpot types may be different from that in the first embodiment described above, and for example, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 26(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. , and mode E, mode C, and mode A are the gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 26(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode A after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. When the lottery result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. If the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game executed using the jackpot as a trigger ends. That is, after the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the lottery result is a jackpot, in the case of a normal jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode A, and in the case of a probability-variable jackpot by winning the first starting opening 314L, 314R. The mode is shifted to mode C, and in the case of a jackpot with variable probability in winning the second starting opening 315, the mode is shifted to mode E.

FIG. 26(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 2R normal jackpot at 25%, 2R probability strange jackpot at 25%. It is 75%. Therefore, from mode A, the game basically shifts to mode A or mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25% and the probability of shifting to mode C is 75%.

In mode C, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the distribution of jackpot types in the first special figure game is 25% for 2R normal jackpot and 75% for 2R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, the distribution of jackpot types in the second special figure game is 25% for 5R probability variable jackpots, 50% for 16R probability variable jackpots, and 25% for 5R regular jackpots. Therefore, from mode C, it is possible to shift to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25% and the probability of shifting to mode C is 37.5%. , the probability of transition to mode E is 37.5%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of jackpot types in the second special figure game is 25% for 5R probability variable jackpot, 50% for 16R probability variable jackpot, and 25% for 5R regular jackpot. %. Therefore, from mode C, the mode is basically shifted to mode A or mode E after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25% and the probability of shifting to mode E is 75%.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, since the gaming machine 10 does not execute mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIG. If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1900: Yes), steps S1903 and S1904 regarding the time saving flag in the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 23) ) is omitted, and if the lottery result is a loss, the game state transition process is ended without changing the mode.

On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1900: No), and when the jackpot game end flag that is set to ON in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. 17 is set to ON ( Step S1914: Yes), sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S1915), and executes processing to shift from the jackpot game state to mode A, mode C, or mode E depending on the jackpot type (step S2001-S2009). Steps S2001 to S2009 will be explained below.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is It is determined whether the lottery result is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) (step S2001). Whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. .

When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the jackpot gaming state to mode A of the special figure gaming state (step S2002), and sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2003). ), the process moves to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the process moves to step S2004.

<Steps S2004 to S2006>
If the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004). ). Whether or not the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot is determined by whether or not the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 22, is set to ON.

When the lottery result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot (step S2004: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode C of the special pattern gaming state (step S2005), and sets the mode C flag to ON (step S2005). S2006), the process moves to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a 2R probable jackpot (step S2004: No), the process moves to step S2007.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
If the lottery result is neither a normal jackpot (step S2001: No) nor a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode E of the special figure gaming states (step S2007), sets the mode E flag to ON (step S2008), and shifts the process to step S2009.

<Step S2009>
When the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to ON (steps S2003, S2006 and S2008), it sets the jackpot type flag to OFF (step S2009). That is, the MPU 41 turns off the jackpot type flags among the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag. When the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to OFF, the MPU 41 ends the gaming state transition process.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special figure game state consists of three modes, mode A, mode B, and mode E, and there is no time-saving mode (mode B, mode D) with a limited number of times as a time-saving mode. Further, when the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the game shifts to mode A, which is a non-time saving mode, after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, the proportion of stays in the time-saving mode is lower than in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, the time-saving mode is a mode in which you can expect the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, so you can expect a 5R surefire jackpot or a 16R surefire jackpot that will trigger the transition to mode E. can. Therefore, since the stay ratio in the time-saving mode becomes low, it is difficult to shift to mode E, which is the time-saving mode, and the game property is such that it is easy to fall into mode A. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a variety of mode transitions and a variety of prize balls that players can obtain.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, has been explained, but if there are three modes, there are three modes, mode A, mode B, and mode D, mode A, mode B, and There may be three modes: mode E, or three modes: mode A, mode C, and mode D. Further, the special game state may be 4 modes or 6 or more modes. As an example when the special game state is 4 modes, there are 4 modes: mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D; 4 modes: mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode E; mode A, mode B, and mode There are four modes: D and mode E.

Moreover, the special figure game state may include modes other than mode A to mode E. For example, the special figure game state includes, in addition to modes A and E, a slight time-saving mode in which the number of time-savings is limited to a small number, for example, the number of time-savings is about 1/40 to 1/10 of the jackpot probability. Good too. The slight time-saving mode may include a difficult-to-support slight time-saving mode in which it is difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36, and an easy-to-support slight time-saving mode in which it is easy to receive support from the electric support member 36. A transition is made to the difficult support slight time saving mode after a jackpot game for a jackpot in mode A, and a transition is made to the easy support slight time saving mode after a jackpot game for a jackpot in the difficult support slight time saving mode. In addition, mode A is entered after playing a predetermined number of special figure games in the short time saving mode, and mode E is entered into a jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 315, and the lottery result is a jackpot. In this case, the transition occurs after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. The game machine 10, which has four special game states including the difficult-to-support slight time-saving mode and the easy-to-support slight time-saving mode, has a high-probability mode right/fail table as a jackpot hit/fail table so that it can fall from mode E to mode A, for example. It is preferable to configure it as an ST or V-ST with an upper limit on the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed based on a table.

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special figure game state consists of five modes, Mode A to Mode E, and there is no upper limit to the number of consecutive jackpots. On the other hand, in this embodiment, like the second embodiment, the special figure game state is in three modes: mode A, mode C, and mode E, and the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 12(A)) This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the number of jackpots from the so-called first jackpot continues up to a predetermined upper limit number. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a limit machine that has three special figure gaming states: mode A, mode C, and mode E.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 28(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 28(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 28(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, 28(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in step S1609 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. 20, and FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 28(A) defines the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Unlike the first embodiment described above, there are three types of jackpots in this embodiment: a 2R probability variable jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, and a 16R probability variation jackpot, and all jackpots are probability variation jackpots. However, if the number of jackpots after the first hit reaches the upper limit, that jackpot will be treated as a normal jackpot, and after the jackpot game ends, a jackpot lottery will be held based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (A)). The mode is forcibly shifted to mode A in which the process is performed.

In addition, the jackpot in the first special drawing game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 is divided into either the 2R fixed variable jackpot or the 5R fixed variable jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 2R fixed variable jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot is 75:25. be. That is, in the jackpot in the first special figure game, there is no distribution of the 16R probability variable jackpot, where you can expect to obtain a large amount of game balls, and there is a large distribution of the 2R probability variable jackpot, in which the expected value of the game balls obtained is small, You cannot expect to acquire a large amount of game balls. On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special drawing game due to winning in the second starting opening 315 is divided into either the 5R fixed variable jackpot or the 16R fixed variable jackpot, and the allocation ratio between the 5R fixed variable jackpot and the 16R fixed variable jackpot is 50:50. be. That is, in the jackpot in the second special figure game, there is no distribution of 2R probability-variable jackpots, and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be obtained.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. , and mode E, mode C, and mode A are the gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 28(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the player wins a jackpot equal to the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win, and shifts to mode A after the last jackpot game ends. Note that until the jackpot is won for the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win, the game will not fall into mode A unless the remaining number of jackpots stored in the RAM 412 is erased. In addition, except after the end of the last jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the first special figure game due to winning in the first starting opening 314, mode C is entered, and by winning in the second starting opening 315. After the jackpot game for the jackpot in the second special figure game ends, the mode is shifted to mode E.

FIG. 28(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, as mentioned above, you cannot expect to win in the second starting hole 315, and the first special drawing game is executed by winning in the first starting hole 314, so from mode A, irregular cases except for 100% mode C. Furthermore, since the mode A is shifted to after the end of the last jackpot game, the mode A is not shifted to after the jackpot game for the jackpot in mode A is finished.

In mode C, by performing a left-handed hit, a first special figure game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 and a second special figure game due to winning in the second starting opening 315 are executed alternately. Therefore, except after the end of the last jackpot game, in the case of a jackpot in the first special figure game, the mode will shift to mode C after the jackpot game ends, and in the second special figure game by winning the second starting opening 315. In the case of a jackpot, the game shifts to mode E after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in mode C, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately, so except for irregular cases, the probability of transition to mode C is 50%, and the probability of transition to mode E is 50%. becomes 50%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, so from mode E, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game ends.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a limit machine, the special symbol fluctuation start process has a difference from the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol variation start process of this embodiment, steps S1811 to S1817 regarding the time saving flag and the time saving counter are omitted in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. When the special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to ON (step S1810), the game state transition process ends. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment includes step S1805 of allocating the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1807) in the special figure change start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. In place of the lottery result flag setting process (step S1807), if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a special symbol type is set for setting the jackpot type flag and the special symbol type that was the target of the jackpot lottery. The difference is that a flag is set (steps S2101 and S2102) and a step of monitoring the number of probability-variable jackpots (steps S2103 to S2107) is executed. In addition, this embodiment does not include mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, as the special figure game state, so in the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the special figure of the above-mentioned first embodiment is not included. Steps S2101 to S2107 in the variation start process will be described below.

<Step S2101>
When the MPU 41 has distributed the jackpot type (step S1805), it sets a jackpot type flag (step S2101). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets on one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag according to the jackpot type distributed in step S1805. Note that in this step S2101, unlike the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22 in the first embodiment, the out-of-order flag required for counting the number of time reductions is not set. Not done.

<Step S2102>
The MPU 41 sets a special symbol type flag that specifies the special symbol type that is the target of the jackpot lottery (step S2102). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first special figure game is a jackpot, and sets the first special figure jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON.

<Steps S2103 to S2107>
In step S2103, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining set number M is 0 with respect to the jackpot upper limit number (initial set number Mmax) set in the next step S2104. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the first hit. If the remaining set number M is 0 (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial set number Mmax as the remaining set number M (step S2104), and moves the process to step S1807. The initial number of sets Mmax is, for example, a predetermined number of sets from a range of 3 to 10 times.

On the other hand, if the remaining set number M is not 0 (step S2103: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the remaining set number M (step S2105), and determines whether the remaining set number M after the subtraction is 0. (Step S2106). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots. If the remaining set number M after the subtraction is 0 (step S2106: Yes), that is, if the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON. (Step S2107), the process moves to step S1807. The jackpot limit flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot has been won a number of times corresponding to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104, that is, the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots. This jackpot limit flag is referred to in step S2202 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 30, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to transition to mode A. Furthermore, if the remaining set number M after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2106: No), that is, if the current jackpot is not the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON. The process proceeds to step S1807 without any further processing.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the special figure gaming state does not include mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes with a limited number of times, so in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIG. 30, the above-mentioned In the gaming state transition process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, steps related to the time saving mode are omitted, and steps for transitioning to mode B and mode D are omitted. In addition, in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment, if it is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot, the mode A is entered, and the special symbol type in which the jackpot lottery was performed, which is the trigger for the transition to the jackpot gaming state. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the mode shifts to mode C or mode E depending on the situation (steps S2201 to S2212). Steps S2201 to S2212 will be explained below.

<Step S2201>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is set to on in step S2101 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. The jackpot type flag is set to OFF (step S2001). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to ON among the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF upon completion of the jackpot game.

<Steps S2202 to S2205>
The MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot limit flag that is set to on in step S2105 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 29 is set to on (step S2202). That is, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is the last jackpot for the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 of the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot limit flag for transition to is set to on. When the jackpot limit flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to OFF (step S2203), shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode A (step S2204), and sets the jackpot limit flag to mode A (step S2204). The A flag is set on (step S2205), and the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S2206 to S2009>
The MPU 41 determines that the jackpot limit flag is set to OFF (step S2202: No), and the first special pattern jackpot flag that is set to ON in step S2102 in the special pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 29 is set to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S2206). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery that triggered the transfer of the jackpot game is for the first special figure game.

When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to OFF (step S2207), and also sets mode C of the special figure game state. (Step S2208), sets the mode C flag to ON (Step S2209), and ends the game state transition process. On the other hand, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the process moves to step S2010.

<Steps S2210 to S2212>
If the first special drawing jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the second special drawing jackpot flag is set to on, and therefore turns off the second special drawing jackpot flag. At the same time as setting (step S2210), the mode is shifted to mode E of the special figure gaming state (step S2211), the mode E flag is set on (step S2212), and the gaming state transition process is ended.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has three modes, Mode A, Mode C, and Mode E, which have different advantages for the player as a special figure playing state, and the number of jackpots from the first hit is predetermined. Continue until the specified upper limit. In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the mode transition destination differs depending on whether it is a jackpot in the first special figure game or a jackpot in the second special figure game. Therefore, in this embodiment, in mode E, where you can expect to obtain a large number of game balls with the number of sets remaining after the first hit (initial number of sets Mmax - 1), how many sets of jackpots are left? It is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having game features such as whether to shift to mode E or how much to distribute to the 16R jackpot game after shifting to mode E.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there is a jackpot in the first special figure game in mode A, the transition will be 100% to mode C after the end of the jackpot game, but in the case of a jackpot in the first special figure game in mode A The mode may be shifted to mode C at a certain percentage, for example, 50%, and mode A may be looped at the remaining percentage. By doing this, it is possible to provide a game in which mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player, may loop, and as a result, when moving to mode C, it is possible to obtain a large number of jackpots while still having a large number of jackpots. The game quality is not only how to move to mode E, where you can expect to get a number of game balls, but also how to move to mode C, where you can expect to move to mode E, while leaving a large number of jackpots. It is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having the following.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to mode A, mode C' and mode E', which are a high probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and a time-saving mode with a limited number of times, are provided as the special figure game state. There are 3 modes including: Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is an ST machine that has variable probability jackpots for all jackpot types and shifts to a time-saving mode (mode C' or mode E') for a limited number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 31(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. 31(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process in FIG. 17.

As shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 31(A), the jackpot in the first special drawing game due to the winning in the first starting opening 314 is distributed to the 2R sure-variable jackpot, and the jackpot due to winning in the second starting opening 315. The jackpot in the second special figure game is divided into 16R probability-variable jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, all the jackpots are probability variable jackpots, and the jackpot types are distributed according to the special symbol types. Of course, the distribution of the jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.For example, all jackpots do not have to be variable jackpots, and variable jackpots and normal jackpots are predetermined. It is also conceivable that the amount may be distributed according to the ratio of .

As shown in FIG. 31(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. The contents of mode A are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are time-saving modes with a limited number of times. That is, mode C' and mode E' are high probability modes in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and a time saving mode with a limited number of times. Here, the upper limit number of time saving times in mode C' and mode E' is set to be approximately the same as the upper limit number of time saving times in mode B and mode D in the first embodiment, and is, for example, 50 times. Then, mode E', mode C', and mode A are gaming states that are advantageous to the player in this order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 31(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode C' and mode E', the mode shifts to mode A. When the lottery result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. If the lottery result is a 16R probability-variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E' after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. That is, after the end of the limited time saving mode, the mode falls from mode C' or mode E' to mode A, and in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot by winning the first starting opening 314L, 314R, the mode is shifted to mode C', and the second In the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot in winning the starting hole 315, the mode is shifted to mode E'.

FIG. 31(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the type of jackpot in the first special figure game is 100% 2R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, from mode A, the game shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game executed in response to the jackpot ends.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. Moreover, as mentioned above, in the first special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and in the second special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, if the lottery result becomes a jackpot before the end of the time-saving mode, the mode will shift from mode C' to either mode C' or mode E' after the end of the jackpot game that is triggered by the jackpot. Ru. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed in mode C' without transitioning to the jackpot game state, mode C' is transitioned to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 100% 16R probability variable jackpot, so from mode E', the corresponding jackpot After the jackpot game executed triggered by this ends, the mode shifts to mode E'. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed in mode E' without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that there are two types of jackpots: 2R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, so in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. Depending on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, one of a 2R probability variable jackpot flag, a 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and a loss flag is set as a lottery result flag. In addition, in this embodiment, since the special figure gaming state is three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E', in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the above-mentioned first The game state transition process of the embodiment (see FIGS. 23 and 24) differs in the mode transition process (steps S2301 to S2308). Steps S2301 to S2308 will be explained below.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301 shown in FIG. 32, when the time saving mode ends and mode C' or mode E' shifts to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 selects the mode C' flag set to ON or the mode Set the E' flag off.

<Steps S2302 to S2305>
In step S2302 shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot game state flag and time saving when the jackpot game end flag that is set to on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. When the flag is set to OFF (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether the 2R probability variable jackpot flag set in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variable jackpot.

If the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2302: Yes), that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 performs a special The mode is shifted to mode C' of the gaming states shown in the figure (step S2303), and the mode C' flag is set on (step S2304). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2305), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S2306 to S2308>
If the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2302: No), that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 performs a special The mode is shifted to mode E' of the gaming states shown in the figure (step S2306), and the mode E' flag is set on (step S2307). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2308), and ends the gaming state transition process.

In this manner, in this embodiment, in order to shift to mode E', which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through mode C'. That is, in order to shift to mode E', after shifting to mode C' due to the first hit, it is necessary to achieve a jackpot in the second special figure game before the time saving mode ends. Since the first hit in mode A and the jackpot in the first special figure game in mode C' are 2R guaranteed variable jackpots, the number of game balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is small and stays in mode A and mode C'. During this period, we cannot expect an increase in the number of game balls. On the other hand, in mode E' when hitting right-handed, the jackpot is 100% 16R, so you can expect to win a large amount of game balls in the jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, after shifting to mode C' after the first hit, how quickly can you get a big hit in the second special figure game and shift to mode E' where you can expect to get a large amount of game balls? It is possible to provide a gaming machine which has a game feature and further has a game feature of how many jackpots are won and a large amount of game balls are obtained in a time-saving mode after shifting to mode E'.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, unlike the first embodiment described above, this embodiment has three special figure game states, mode A, mode C', and mode E', similarly to the fourth embodiment described above. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to the time-saving mode for a limited number of times after the variable probability jackpot game ends, on the condition that a game ball enters the V winning hole of the special variable winning device in a specific round of the variable probability jackpot game. It is a V-ST machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 34 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 35(B) and 35(D) are plan views showing the essential parts of the special variable winning device 82, and FIG. 36(A) is a jackpot type distribution table. FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table. FIG. 36(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 36(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. 17, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are the steps of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. FIGS. 40 and 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process in FIG. 17.

As shown in FIG. 34, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a special variable winning device 82 provided on the gaming board 31. The special variable winning device 82 is provided below the variable winning opening 316b.
As shown in FIGS. 35(A) to 35(D), the special variable winning device 82 includes an introduction port 821 for introducing the game ball 99 into the special variable winning device 82, and a closure for closing this introduction port 821. A movable tongue portion 822 is provided that is moved forward and backward with respect to the game board 31 by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 between the position and the open position where the introduction port 821 is opened. As shown in FIGS. 35(A) and 35(B), when the movable tongue portion 822 is in the standby position and the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822, the game ball 99 is moved to the special variable winning device. 82. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(D), when the movable tongue portion 822 is in the open position and the introduction port 821 is open, the game ball 99 is inside the special variable winning device 82. can be introduced. In addition, when the special variable prize opening 39 is not operated, the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822. On the other hand, the introduction port 821 is opened when the movable tongue portion 822 is operated in the V winning round described later in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(E), inside the special variable winning device 82, a movable claw portion 823, a V winning hole 824, and a normal winning hole 825 are provided. The V winning hole 824 and the normal winning hole 825 are each provided with a ball entering sensor (not shown), and these ball entering sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 824 or the normal winning hole 825. be done. The movable claw portion 823 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a left tilted position that guides the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 and a right tilted position that guides the game ball 99 to the normal winning opening 825. be done. When the special variable winning hole 39 is not operated, the movable claw portion 823 is tilted to the left and is on standby in a state where it guides the game ball 99 to the V winning hole 824. The movable claw portion 823 changes from the left-tilt state to the right-tilt state when it is detected that a game ball 99 has won in the V-winning hole 824 in the later-described V-winning round in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated. Rotated. Further, when the V winning round in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated is completed, the movable claw portion 823 returns to the left tilted state and waits in a state where the game ball 99 is guided to the V winning opening 824.

As shown in FIG. 36(A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special figure game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 is divided into a 4R normal jackpot or a 5R sure-change jackpot. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the first to fourth round games are executed as a game in which a game ball is won to the variable winning hole 316b, and the V winning round game in which the special variable winning device 82 wins a game ball is not executed. . Therefore, in the 4R normal jackpot game, the game ball cannot be won in the V winning hole 824, and the game does not shift to the time saving mode. On the other hand, in the 5R variable jackpot game, for example, the first to fourth rounds are executed as a game in which the game ball is won in the variable winning hole 316b (see FIG. 4), and the fifth round game is a game in which the game ball is won in the variable winning hole 316b (see FIG. 4). It is played as a round game. Therefore, in the 5R variable jackpot game, the player can enter the time saving mode after the jackpot game ends by placing the game ball 99 in the V winning hole 824 of the special variable winning device 82 in the fifth round game. can. Also, since the 5th round game is executed as a V winning round game, depending on whether the 5th round game which is a V winning round game is executed after the end of the 4th round game, it will be 4R normal jackpot or 5R You can know if it is a guaranteed jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by performing a promotion performance (including a failure performance) after the completion of the 4-round game.

On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special figure game due to winning in the second starting opening 315 is divided into a 10R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot. In the 10R certain variable jackpot game and the 16R certain variable jackpot game, a specific round game is set as a V winning round game. There may be at least one specific round game, and there may be two or more. Further, when the jackpot type in mode E' is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, for example, 10 rounds are set as a specific round game. By doing this, it is possible to know after the V winning round game whether there will be 11 rounds after executing the V winning round game, that is, whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot. I can do it. Therefore, after the execution or completion of the 10 round game, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by, for example, performing a promotion effect from a 10R probability variable jackpot to a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, regarding the distribution of the jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 36(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. The contents of mode A are the same as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, in mode A, the first special figure game is executed by performing a left-handed hit, so the probability change expectation level when the lottery result becomes a jackpot in mode A is 50%. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are limited time saving modes, and are the same as the fourth embodiment described above. . In addition, in mode C', the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 by left-handed hitting, so the probability change expectation when the lottery result becomes a jackpot in mode C' is It is 75%. In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, so the probability change expectation level when the lottery result becomes a jackpot in mode E' is 100%. In this way, the present embodiment has three modes with different probability variation expectations, and mode E', mode C', and mode A are gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 36(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E', if the upper limit number of special symbol games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state, if the jackpot game ends when the lottery result is a 4R probability variable jackpot, and if the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. In this case, when the jackpot game ends without the game ball 99 winning in the V winning hole 824, the mode is shifted to mode A. When the lottery result is a 5R probability-variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game ends on the condition that a game ball 99 wins a prize in a V winning hole 824 in a V winning round game of the jackpot game. When the lottery result is a 10R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game ends on the condition that a game ball 99 wins a prize in a V-winning hole 824 in a V-winning round game of the jackpot game.

FIG. 36(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 4R normal jackpot with 50%, 5R probability strange jackpot with 50%. It is 50%. Therefore, from mode A, after the end of the jackpot game, the game shifts to mode A at a rate of 50% and mode C' at a rate of 50%.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. In addition, as mentioned above, in the first special figure game, 50% is allocated to the 4R regular jackpot and 50% to the 5R definite variable jackpot, and in the second special figure game, 25% is distributed to the 10R probable variable jackpot, and 75% is distributed to the 16R probable variable jackpot. It will be distributed according to the ratio of Therefore, from mode C', if the lottery result becomes a jackpot before the end of the time-saving mode, the game shifts to one of modes A, C', and E' after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode transitions from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of jackpot types in the second special figure game is 25% for 10R probability variable jackpot and 75% for 16R probability variable jackpot, so mode From E', the mode shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game ends on the condition that the game ball 99 wins in the V winning hole 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode E', and in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, the game ball 99 wins in the V winning hole 824. If the jackpot game ends without any error, mode E' shifts to mode A.

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, in this embodiment, there are four types of jackpots: 4R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment. In the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the start process, according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the lottery result flags are set as the 4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and loss flag. One of the following is set. In the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening 316b or the special variable winning device 82 depending on the jackpot type. To execute control for playing a jackpot game in which a round game is executed a plurality of times.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag set to on in step S2600 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. to decide. If the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402, and if it determines that it is not the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: No), the process proceeds to step S2402. The process moves to step S2407.

<Steps S2402 to S2404>
When it is the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 specifies the jackpot type (step S2402), and determines whether the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step S2403). The jackpot type is the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) that is set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. flag) is set on or not.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (step S2403: Yes), it sets a V winning round in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated according to the number of rounds of the probability variable jackpot (step S2404). ), the process moves to step S2405. For example, the MPU 41 sets 5 rounds as the V winning round in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets 10 rounds as the V winning round in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot and a 16R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is not a variable jackpot (step S2403: No), the process proceeds to step S2405 without setting the V winning round in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated.

<Steps S2405 and S2406>
In step S2405, the MPU 41 is based on the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) set to ON in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. Then, the number R of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the number of round games R to "4" when the 4R normal jackpot flag is on, sets the number of round games R to "5" when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on, and sets the number of round games R to "5" when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on. When the jackpot flag is on, the number of round games R is set as ``10'', and when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is on, the round game number R is set as ``16'' and stored in the RAM 412. As a result, the MPU 41 executes round games of the number R of round games according to the jackpot type in the opening/closing execution mode control process of step S2416, which will be described later. Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to ON (step S2406) and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2407, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start counting the opening time.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag set to on in step S2406 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening has started. If the opening flag is set to on (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2408, and if the opening flag is set to off (step S2407: No), the process moves to step S2415. Transition.

<Step S2408>
If the opening flag is set to ON (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time, which will be started in step S2409 described later, is being counted (step S2408). If the opening time is being counted (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2410, and if the opening time is not being measured (step S2408: No), the process moves to step S2409.

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 starts measuring the opening execution time and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time for which timing is started in step S2409 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether to end the opening and shift to the opening/closing execution mode in step S2410, which will be described later.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening time for which time measurement is started in step S2409 has reached a predetermined time period necessary for executing the opening. If the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2411, and if the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2410: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Steps S2411 to S2414>
If the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 ends counting the opening time (step S2411) and sets the opening flag to OFF (step S2412). Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag to ON (step S2413), and sets the 1 round start flag to ON (step S2214). The opening/closing execution mode flag is referred to when determining whether to shift to opening/closing execution mode processing in step S2415, which will be described later. Further, the first round start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the first round of the opening/closing execution mode in step S2501 of opening/closing execution mode processing in FIG. 38, which will be described later.

<Step S2415>
In step S2415, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening/closing execution mode flag set to on in step S2413 is set to on. If the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to ON (step S2415: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2416, and if the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2415: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2416. The process moves to step S2417.

<Step S2416>
In step S2416, the MPU 41 executes opening/closing execution mode control processing. In the opening/closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game that operates the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 multiple times depending on the jackpot type. Note that details of the opening/closing execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

<Step S2417>
In step S2417, the MPU 41 determines whether the ending flag, which is set to on in step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39, which will be described later, is set to on. If the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2418, and if the ending flag is set to OFF (step S2417: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Step S2418>
If the ending flag is set to on (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time, which will be started in step S2419 described later, is being counted (step S2418). If the ending time is being counted (step S2418: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2420, and if the ending time is not being measured (step S2418: No), the process moves to step S2419.

<Step S2419>
In step S2419, the MPU 41 starts counting the ending time after starting the ending, and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time measured in step S2419 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether to end the ending (jackpot game) in step S2420, which will be described later.

<Step S2420>
In step S2420, the MPU 41 determines whether the ending time for which time measurement is started in step S2419 has reached a predetermined time period necessary for executing the ending. If the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2421, and if the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2420: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Steps S2421 to S2423>
If the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 turns off the ending flag that is set to on in step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process in FIG. 39, which will be described later. ). Furthermore, the MPU 41 ends counting the ending time (step S2422), sets the jackpot game end flag to ON (step S2423), and ends the jackpot game control process. Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. The jackpot game end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1914 in the gaming state transition process in FIG. The game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to one of mode A, mode C', and mode E' in accordance with the above.

[Opening/closing execution mode control processing]
In the opening/closing execution mode control process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the round game in which the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 is operated as described above is executed multiple times depending on the jackpot type.

<Steps S2501 and S2502>
In step S2501, the MPU 41 determines whether the 1 round start flag set to on in step S2414 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 37 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to start the opening/closing execution mode (or not to start the first round in the round game). If the 1st round start flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 1st round start flag to OFF (step S2502), and then moves the process to step S2506. On the other hand, if the 1-round start flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2503.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable prize opening opening flag set to on in step S2510 of the opening/closing execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable winning hole 316b of the variable winning device 316 is open. If the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2511 of FIG. 39, and if the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2503). :No), the process moves to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device activation flag, which is set to on in step S2508 of the opening/closing execution mode control process, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the special variable winning device 82 is in operation. If the special variable winning device activation flag is set to ON (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2514 in FIG. 39, and if the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2504: No), the process moves to step S2505.

<Step S2505>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2503: No) and the special variable winning device activation flag is set to OFF (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 starts timing in step S2522 of FIG. It is determined whether the interval time exceeds a predetermined time (step S2505). Here, the interval time is a pause time from the end of a round game until the start of the next round game. That is, in step S2505, the MPU 41 determines whether to end the interval and start the round game. If the MPU 41 determines that the interval time has exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the process moves to step S2506, and if it determines that the interval time has not exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: No), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S2506. In order to continue, the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
If the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the round game scheduled to start is the V winning round set in step S2404 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 37 ( Step S2506). When the MPU 41 determines that it is a V winning round (step S2506: Yes), it operates the special variable winning device 82 (step S2507). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable tongue portion 822 of the special variable prize winning device 82 from a standby position where the introduction port 821 is closed to an open position where the introduction port 821 is opened. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device activation flag to ON (step S2508), and ends the opening/closing execution mode control process. The special variable winning device activation flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is activated in step S2504 described above.

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
If the round game scheduled to start is not a V winning round (step S2506: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game scheduled to start is a round game that opens the variable winning opening 316b. 316c opens the variable winning opening 316b (step S2509). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening opening flag to ON (step S2510), and ends the opening/closing execution mode control process. The variable winning opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether the variable winning device 316 is operating (whether the variable winning opening 316b is open or not) in step S2503 described above.

<Step S2511>
If the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), in step S2511 of FIG. 39, the MPU 41 determines whether the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied. . Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning hole 316b was opened, or whether the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning hole 316b has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). Decide whether or not. If the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2512, and if the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are not satisfied. (Step S2511: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended in order to maintain the open state of the variable winning a prize opening 316b.

<Steps S2512 and S2513>
If the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316b by returning the opening/closing door 316c (step S2512), and further closes the variable winning opening 316b. The release flag is set to off (step S2513).

<Steps S2514 to S2516>
When the special variable winning device activation flag is set to ON (step S2504 in FIG. 38: Yes), in step S2514, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has won in the V winning opening 824 of the special variable winning device 82. to judge. Whether or not a game ball has won in the V winning hole 824 is determined based on the detection result of a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning hole 824. In addition, in the special variable winning device 82, the variable claw portion 393 is tilted to the left at the start of operation, so the game ball that is first introduced into the special variable winning device 82 is placed in the variable claw portion 393 in the left tilted state. is guided to the V winning opening 824. When the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has won in the V winning opening 824 (Step S2514: Yes), it sets the V winning flag to ON (Step S2515), and tilts the variable claw part 393 of the special variable winning device 82 to the left. It is rotated from the state to the right tilted state (step S2516). That is, when it is confirmed that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 824, the MPU 41 guides the game ball introduced into the special variable winning device 82 to the normal winning hole 825 by the variable claw portion 393 tilted to the right. .

<Step S2517>
If a game ball has not entered the V winning hole 824 (step S2514: No), or if a game ball has entered the V winning hole 824, the V winning flag is set to ON and the movable claw portion 823 is tilted to the right. When the special variable prize winning device 82 is activated (step S2514: Yes and steps S2515 and S2516), the MPU 41 determines whether the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the special variable winning device 82 was started (after the introduction port 821 was opened by the start of the operation of the movable tongue portion 822). It is determined whether the number of game balls introduced into the special variable prize winning device 82 (the total number of game balls entered into the V winning hole 824 and the normal winning hole 825) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, nine balls). . If the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2518, and sets the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82. If not established (step S2517: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended in order to continue the operation of the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2518 to S2520>
If the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the operation of the special variable winning device 82 (step S2518). Specifically, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821 by returning the movable tongue part 822, and returns the movable claw part 823 to the left tilted state, and when the next time the special variable winning device 82 starts operating, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821. The ball is guided to the V winning hole 824. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device activation flag to OFF (step S2519), and moves the process to step S2520.

<Steps S2520 and S2521>
When the variable prize opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2513) or when the special variable prize winning device activation flag is set to OFF (step S2519), the MPU 41 subtracts the number of round games R stored in the RAM 412 by 1. After that (step S2520), it is determined whether the round game number R after the subtraction is "0" (step S2521). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the round game that ended earlier is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. If the number R of round games after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2523, and if the number R of round games after subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No). ), the process moves to step S2522.

<Step S2522>
If the round game number R after the subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No), the MPU 41 starts counting the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S2522), and executes the opening/closing execution mode control process. end. The interval time at which time measurement is started in step S2522 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2505 of FIG. 38 in order to determine whether it is the timing to operate the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2523 and S2524>
If the round game number R after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game that ended earlier is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In order to end the mode, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2523), and the ending flag is further set to on (step S2524), and the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2417 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 to determine whether to start the ending.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in this embodiment, since there are two types of jackpots, 2R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. As a result flag, one of a 2R probability variable jackpot flag, a 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and a loss flag is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the flowchart regarding the procedure of special symbol fluctuation start processing is omitted. In addition, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, after the jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S1906, the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S2600 in FIG. 40). The jackpot game start flag indicates that the jackpot game is started, and is referenced by the MPU 41 in step S2401 of the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the special figure gaming state is three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E', in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the above-mentioned first The process for mode transition is different from the gaming state transition process of the embodiment (see FIGS. 23 and 24) (steps S2601 to S2610). Steps S2601 to S2610 will be explained below.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601 shown in FIG. 40, when the time saving mode ends and mode C' or mode E' shifts to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 selects the mode C' flag set to ON or the mode Set the E' flag off.

<Steps S2602 to S2604>
In step S2602 shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41, when ending the jackpot game (step S1914: Yes and steps S1915 and S1917), sets the V winning flag to be set to ON in step S2515 of the opening/closing execution mode control process in FIG. is set to on (step S2602). If the V winning flag is not set to ON (step S2602: No), the MPU 41 shifts to mode A of the special figure gaming state (step S2603), and further sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2604). ), the process moves to step S2610. That is, in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, or in the case where no game ball enters the V winning hole 824 in the V winning round in the variable probability jackpot game, the MPU 41 selects mode A, which is neither the time saving mode nor the high probability mode, after the jackpot game ends. to be transferred to

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the V winning flag is on (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set on in the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, to be on. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S2605). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variable jackpot. When the 5R probability-variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C' of the special figure gaming state (step S2606), and further sets the mode C' flag to ON. (Step S2607), the process moves to step S2610. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability-variable jackpot and a game ball enters the V-winning slot 824 in the V-winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 operates in a time-saving mode and with a high probability after the jackpot game ends. The mode is changed to mode C'.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the V winning flag is on and the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is off (step S2602: Yes and step S2605: No), the MPU 41 turns it on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. Since it can be determined that either the 10R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag set to is set to ON, the jackpot game state is shifted to mode E' of the special figure game state (step S2608), Furthermore, the mode E' flag is set on (step S2609), and the process moves to step S2610. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 10R variable jackpot or a 16R variable jackpot, and a game ball is entered into the V winning hole 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 saves time after the jackpot game ends. mode and a high-probability mode E'.

<Step S2610>
The MPU 41 selects the jackpot type flag that is set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. The flag is set to OFF (step S2610), and the game state transition process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to shift to mode E', which is most advantageous for the player, after shifting to mode C', which is distributed with a 50% probability in the first hit, mode C' is set to the time-saving mode. By the end of the game, it is necessary to win a jackpot in the second special figure game, which is distributed by the distribution device 35 with a probability of 50%. That is, in this embodiment, except when the mode falls due to the end of the time saving mode, the probability of a variable jackpot is 50% in mode A, 75% in mode C', and 100% in mode E', and there are three levels. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with variable rate.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the special variable winning device 82 having the V winning hole 824 is provided separately from the variable winning device 316, but if the variable winning device 316 is provided with the V winning hole 824 that can be opened and closed, The configuration may be such that the V winning hole 824 is opened in the V winning round of the game.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in this embodiment, like the second embodiment described above, there are three special figure game states: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a 1 type 2 type mixed machine that performs a type 1 game, which is a special figure game using the first starting port 314 and a second starting port 315, and a type 2 game using the feather accessory device. It is.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 42 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot success/failure table, FIG. 45(B) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table for a type 1 jackpot, and FIG. 45(C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table for a type 2 jackpot. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 45(D) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 45(E) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing performed in the main processing of FIG. 46, and FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the wing accessory device control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process to be executed, FIGS. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process to be executed in the main process of FIG. 46.

As shown in FIG. 42, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a wing accessory device 83 provided on the game board 31. The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. 43, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 43) in which the introduction port 831 is closed. ) and an open position (the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 43) where the inlet 831 is opened. In a state where the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44(A) and 44(B), when the movable wing section 832 is in the open position and the introduction port 831 is open, the movable wing section 832 can receive the game ball. It is. The game ball received by the movable wing section 832 can be introduced into the interior of the wing accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable wing section 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery triggered by a winning at the second starting port 315 is a small win (see FIG. 45(A)), and the movable wing section 832 is operated to the open position, and the movable wing section 832 is operated to the open position and the inlet port 831 is opened for a predetermined period of time. For example, the wing accessory device 83 is opened only for the time (about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds) for 1 to 3 game balls to enter. Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of a small win may be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the wing accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing part 835 are provided. The V winning hole 833 and the normal winning hole 834 are each provided with a ball entering sensor (not shown), and these ball entering sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 or the normal winning hole 834. be done. The V winning hole opening/closing part 835 is operated by a solenoid ( (not shown) or the like. The V winning opening/closing part 835 normally waits in a closed position where the V winning opening 833 is closed, and for example, when the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a small win, the movable wing part 832 is operated to the open position. When the wing accessory device 83 is operated for a predetermined time shorter than the operating time of the movable wing portion 832 in synchronization with the timing, for example, in E mode, the number of times the wing accessory device 83 is operated is the same as the number of time saving times, there is a probability of 50% to 80% that the V winning hole 824 will be opened. The V winning hole 833 is opened only during the time when the game ball wins.

As shown in FIG. 45(A) as a jackpot propriety table, the jackpot propriety table of this embodiment is not classified into high probability mode and low probability mode as in the first embodiment described above (Fig. 12(A) and FIG. 12(B)), the games are classified into a first special pattern game based on winnings in the first starting port 314 and a second special pattern game based on winnings in the second starting port 315. In the first special figure game, three of the counter values (random values) of the jackpot random number counter from 0 to 738 are jackpots, and the remaining 736 pieces, 3 to 738, are misses. The jackpot probability in the figure game is 3/739 (=about 1/246.3), similar to the low probability mode in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the second special figure game, like the first special figure game, three counter values (random values) from 0 to 2 out of the counter values (random values) of the jackpot random number counter from 0 to 738 are jackpots. Yes, the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1/246.3). That is, regardless of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a jackpot in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot in the type 1 game. Also, 723 pieces from 3 to 735 were small hits, and 3 pieces from 736 to 738 were misses. Here, the small win is a win that executes a two-way game in which the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened for a predetermined period of time. When the feather accessory device 83 is activated due to a small hit, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83, it becomes a jackpot in the second type game. That is, in the second special figure game, the main hit is the jackpot in the type 2 game, and like the second special figure game, the probability of a jackpot in the type 1 game is low. Hereinafter, a jackpot in a type 1 game where the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot will be referred to as a "type 1 jackpot", and a jackpot resulting from a game ball entering the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 will be referred to as a "type 2 jackpot". It is sometimes called.

As shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 45(B), the type 1 jackpot is divided into a 4R time-saving jackpot or an 8R time-saving jackpot. Further, as shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 45(C), in the type 2 jackpot, the winnings are divided into 4R time-saving jackpot, 8R time-saving jackpot, or 16R time-saving jackpot. Here, the number of time savings in each time saving jackpot is set according to the lottery probability in the jackpot lottery, the small win probability, the operating time of the feather accessory device 83 at the time of a small win, the operating time of the V prize opening opening/closing part 835, etc. In this embodiment, the number of times is 50, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, all jackpots for both type 1 and type 2 jackpots are time-saving jackpots, but the jackpot types are distributed so that a certain percentage (for example, 20% to 50%) of jackpots are non-time-saving jackpots. It's okay. In this case, the probability that the game ball will win in the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the time the time saving mode ends in mode E' is that the probability that the game ball will be hit right-handed without special hitting methods such as stop-hitting or twist-hitting is As long as this is done, the V winning opening/closing part 835 may be operated so that the winning amount is 90% or more, preferably substantially 100%. In addition, in mode E', the probability that the game ball will win in the V prize opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 before the end of the time saving mode is set to substantially 100%, and an upper limit is set on the number of jackpots from the first hit. It's okay. That is, the gaming machine 10 as a one-type and two-type mixing machine according to the present embodiment may combine the specifications of the limit machine according to the third embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 45(D), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. The contents of mode A, mode C', and mode E' are the same as in the fourth embodiment described above, and mode E', mode C', and mode A are gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 45(E) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E' which are time saving modes, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the mode shifts to mode A. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E' after the jackpot game is finished.

Here, in mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the jackpot in the first special figure game is a type 1 jackpot, so from mode A After the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to mode C'.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. That is, in mode C', a first special figure game in which the type 1 jackpot is 100% and a second special figure game in which the type 2 jackpot is the main one are alternately executed. Therefore, from mode C', on the condition that the time-saving mode does not end, after the end of the jackpot game, there is a probability of approximately 50% (more precisely, a probability of slightly over 50%), and the transition to mode C' is approximately 50%. The mode will shift to mode E' with a probability of (to be exact, a probability of slightly less than 50%). In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode transitions from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the main hit is a type 2 jackpot, with a type 1 jackpot at a low probability (approximately 1/246.3 in this embodiment). Therefore, from mode E', the game generally shifts to mode E' after the end of the jackpot game, and falls to mode C' with a low probability. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode E', the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A. Furthermore, in the case of a type 1 jackpot in mode E', mode E' may be looped without falling to mode C'.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment has a jackpot winning table different from that of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 45(A)), and can execute a two-type game in which the wing accessory device 83 is activated. , a part of the main process is different from the first embodiment described above, and the special figure fluctuation start process and the game state transition process in the special figure game control process executed as the main process are different.
[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the main process of this embodiment, the wing accessory device control process is executed between the special figure game control process of step S1306 and the jackpot game control process of step S1307 (step S2701). Note that details of the wing accessory device control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

[Feather accessory device control processing]
<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the wing accessory device control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special figure fluctuation stop flag, which is set to on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process in FIG. 20, is set to on. (Step S2801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to execute the 2nd type game since the special figure game has ended. When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2802, and determines that the wing accessory device activation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S2801: No), the process moves to step S2809.

<Step S2802>
When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 41 activates the wing accessory device which is set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG. 48, which will be described later. It is determined whether the flag is set on (step S2802). If the MPU 41 determines that the wing accessory device activation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), it can be determined that it is the timing to operate the wing accessory device 83, so the process moves to step S2803. . On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), it can be determined that it is not the timing to operate the wing accessory device 83, so the wing accessory device control process end.

<Steps S2803 to S2808>
When the wing accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the wing accessory device operation flag to OFF (step S2803), and also sets the wing accessory device operation flag to OFF (step S2803). 832 is started (step S2804), and the movable wing section operating flag is set to on (step S2805). As a result, the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and a game ball can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 by the movable wing portion 832. Next, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 (step S2806), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing part operating flag to ON (step S2807). As a result, the V prize opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball introduced into the interior of the feather accessory device 83 through the introduction port 831 is placed in a state in which the V prize opening 833 can be won. Furthermore, the MPU 41 starts counting the operating time (step S2808). The time measured in step S2808 is used to determine whether it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 835 to the standby state and closing the V winning opening 833 in step S2810, which will be described later, or in step S2814. This is referred to by the MPU 41 in order to determine whether or not it is time to return the movable blade portion 832 and close the introduction port 831.

<Step S2809>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), that is, when it is not the timing to operate the wing accessory device 83, the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening/closing part to be set to ON in step S2807. It is determined whether the in-operation flag is set to on (step S2809). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning hole 833 is open. If the V winning opening/closing part operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2810, and if the V winning opening opening/closing part operating flag is set to OFF. (Step S2809: No), the process moves to step S2815.

<Step S2810>
When the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time measured at which time measurement is started in step S2808 corresponds to a first predetermined time. (Step S2810). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 835 to the standby position and closing the V winning opening 833. If the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2813, and if it determines that the clocked time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the process moves to step S2811.

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has won in the V winning hole 833 (step S2811). Whether or not a game ball has won in the V winning hole 833 is determined, for example, by whether or not a game ball has been detected by a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning hole 833. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won in the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: Yes), it sets the type 2 jackpot flag to ON (step S2812), and ends the wing accessory device control process. Here, the type 2 jackpot flag indicates whether to execute a jackpot game based on the winning of a game ball to the V winning hole 833, and the jackpot game state is changed in step S3005 in the game state transition process of FIG. 49, which will be described later. This is referred to by the MPU 41 in order to determine whether or not to shift to. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won in the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: No), the MPU 41 ends the wing accessory device control process without setting the type 2 jackpot flag to ON.

<Steps S2813 and S2814>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), that is, when it determines that it is the timing to close the V winning opening 833, the MPU 41 moves the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 to the standby position. (Step S2813), and sets the V-winning port opening/closing part operation flag to OFF (Step S2814), and ends the wing accessory device control process.

<Step S2815>
If the V winning opening/closing part operating flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the movable wing part operating flag, which is set to ON in step S2805, is set to ON. A judgment is made (step S2815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning hole 833 is open. The MPU 41 determines whether the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is open. If the movable wing section operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2816, and if the movable wing section operating flag is set to OFF (step S2815: No), the wing accessory device control process ends.

<Step S2816>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the movable wing section operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes), and whether or not the clocking time at which timing is started in step S2808 has reached a predetermined second predetermined time. (Step S2816). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to return the movable blade portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. If the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2817, and if it determines that the clocked time has not reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: No), in order to maintain the open state of the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83, the wing accessory device control process is ended.

<Steps S2817 to S2820>
If the clocked time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing section 832 to the standby position, closes the introduction port 831 (step S2817), and sets the movable wing section operating flag. is set to off (step S2818). Thereby, the second type game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is a small win is ended. Further, the MPU 41 finishes counting the operating time of the wing accessory device 83 that was started in step S2808 (step S2819), sets the wing accessory device operation end flag to ON (step S2820), and The physical device control process ends. The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that the operation of the feather accessory device 83 has ended, that is, the 2nd type game has ended, and the 2nd type game is completed in step S3003 of the game state transition process in FIG. 49, which will be described later. After the game ends, it is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether to transition to the jackpot game state.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, the special pattern fluctuation start process is different from the special pattern fluctuation start process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 22). Has a point. As shown in FIG. 48, the special symbol fluctuation start process of this embodiment differs from the special symbol fluctuation start process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 22) in the processing up to setting the lottery result flag. (Steps S2901 to S2908). In addition, in this embodiment, as a lottery result other than the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game, there is a small win in addition to a miss, so in the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the above-mentioned first Steps S1811 and S1817 (see FIG. 22) regarding the loss in the special figure fluctuation start process of the embodiment take into consideration the case of a small hit (steps S2909 and S2910). Steps S2901 to S2910 will be explained below.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
In the special figure variation start process of this embodiment, first, when starting the variation of special figures, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure game scheduled to start is the first special figure game (step S2901). When the MPU 41 determines to start the first special drawing game (step S2901: Yes), it makes a judgment based on the first special drawing jackpot correctness table (see FIG. 45(A)) (step S2902), and executes the process. The process moves to step S2904. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines not to start the first special figure game (step S2901: No), that is, if it determines to start the second special figure game, the MPU 41 selects the second special figure jackpot propriety table (FIG. 45(A)). (see step S2903), and the process moves to step S2904.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. If the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2905, and if the lottery result is not a jackpot (step S2904: No), that is, if the lottery result is a small win or a loss, The process moves to step S2906.

<Step S2905>
If the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 sorts the jackpot type based on the special drawing jackpot table (see FIG. 45(B)) (step S2905), and moves the process to step S2908. . Specifically, the MPU 41 allocates the jackpot type to either the 4R time-saving jackpot or the 8R time-saving jackpot according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter.

<Steps S2906 and S2907>
If the lottery result is not a jackpot (step S2904: No), that is, if the lottery result is a small win or a loss, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result is a small win or not (step S2906). If the lottery result is a small win (step S2906: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the wing accessory device activation flag to ON (step S2907), and moves the process to step S2908. The wing accessory device activation flag is a flag for activating the wing accessory device 83, and in step S2802 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to operate the feather accessory device 83. It is referenced by the MPU 41 for this purpose. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a small win (step S2906: No), that is, if the lottery result is a loss, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2908 without setting the wing accessory device activation flag to ON.

<Step S2908>
When the MPU 41 executes the process according to the lottery result (steps S2904 to S2907), it sets the lottery result flag to ON. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 4R time-saving jackpot or an 8R time-saving jackpot, and sets the small win flag to ON when it is a small win. , sets the out-of-line flag to on if it is out of line.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
When the lottery result flag is set to ON (step S2908), the MPU 41 executes predetermined processing (steps S1807 to S1811) similarly to the first embodiment described above, and then sets the losing flag to be set to ON in step S2908. Alternatively, it is determined whether the small hit flag is set on (step S2809). If the losing flag or the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the losing flag or the small winning flag to OFF (step S2810), and moves the process to step S1815. On the other hand, if the loss flag or the small hit flag is set to OFF (step S2909: No), the process moves to step S1818. Hereinafter, steps S1815 to S1818 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and the special symbol variation start process is ended.

[Game state transition processing]
Since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probability changing machine, in the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above, when the special figure game ends (when the first type game ends ), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode ends, and after the time saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to mode A (see steps S1909 to S1913 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1st type and 2nd type mixing machine, the operation of the wing accessory device is not limited to not only at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the 1st type game). The above-mentioned first method also determines whether or not the time-saving mode ends at the end (at the end of the second type game), and shifts to mode A after the end of the time-saving mode (steps S3001 and S3002 in FIG. 49). This is different from the gaming state transition process of the embodiment. In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot (type 1 jackpot) in the special figure game is used as an opportunity to transition to the jackpot game state, but in this embodiment, not only the type 1 jackpot but also the feather accessory device This differs from the first embodiment described above in that the state shifts to the jackpot game state by the type 2 jackpot based on the winning of the game ball into the V winning hole 833 (steps S3003 to S3005 in FIG. 49). Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the mode transition destination was determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 13(A) and steps S1914 to S1932 in FIG. 23), but in this embodiment, one type This differs from the first embodiment described above in that the mode transition destination is determined depending on whether it is a jackpot or a type 2 jackpot (FIG. 45(E), steps S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50). Steps S3001 to S3012 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

<Step S3001>
In step S3001 shown in FIG. 49, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern fluctuation stop flag to OFF when the special pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1900: Yes and step S1901), It is determined whether the type 1 jackpot flag set to on in step S2908 of the figure fluctuation start process is set to on (step S3001). The type 1 jackpot flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing to shift to the jackpot gaming state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3001: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win or a loss, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the wing accessory device operation flag set to on in step S2907 of the special figure variation start process in FIG. 48 is set to on. The feather accessory device activation flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win, that is, the feather accessory device 83 is to be activated. If the wing accessory device activation flag is set to ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to shift the gaming state because it is necessary to operate the wing accessory device 83. The game state transition process ends. On the other hand, if the wing accessory device activation flag is set to OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 executes processing to determine whether to shift to mode A, mode C', or mode E'. (Steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, Steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Steps S3003 to S3004>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1900: No), the MPU 41 turns on the wing accessory device operation end flag that is set to on in step S2820 of the wing accessory device control process in FIG. is set (step S3003). The wing accessory device operation end flag indicates that it is the timing to end the operation of the wing accessory device 83, that is, it is the timing to return the movable wing portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. be. If the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to OFF (step S3004), and moves the process to step S3005. On the other hand, if the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the process moves to step S1914 in FIG. 50.

<Step S3005>
If it is the timing to end the operation of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3003: Yes and step S3004), the MPU 41 sets the type 2 jackpot flag set to ON in step S2812 of the wing accessory device control process in FIG. It is determined whether it is set to on (step S3005). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state after the operation of the wing accessory device 83 is completed. When the MPU 41 determines that the 2nd type jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the jackpot game state in the same way as when the 1st type jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes). Processing is executed to shift to (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the second type jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 operates in the same manner as when the feather accessory device activation flag is set to OFF (step S3002: No). , executes processing to determine whether to shift to mode A, mode C', or mode E' (steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, and S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Step S3006>
In step S3006 shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game state when the jackpot game end flag that is set to on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. 17 is set to on. When the process is executed (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether the type 1 jackpot flag that is set to on in step S2908 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 48 is set to on. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game is either mode C' or mode E' of the special figure game states. If the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007. On the other hand, if the type 1 jackpot flag is not set on (step S3002: No), that is, if the type 2 jackpot flag is set on, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C' of the special figure gaming state (step S3007), and further sets the mode C' flag to ON. (Step S3008). That is, in the case of a type 1 jackpot in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 is in the time saving mode and high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game, and the MPU 41 alternately operates the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315. The mode is shifted to mode C' in which game balls can enter the ball. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to OFF (step S3009), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
If the Type 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3006: No), that is, if the Type 2 jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E' of the special figure gaming state ( Step S3010), and further sets the mode E' flag to ON (step S3011). That is, in the case of a type 2 jackpot due to the winning of a game ball to the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83, the MPU 41 is in the time saving mode and high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game, and is supported by the electric support member 36. The game ball is shifted to a mode E' in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 2 jackpot flag to OFF (step S3012), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3013>
In addition, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the end of the jackpot game and the mode C' flag is set on (steps S3007 and S3008), and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E' after the end of the jackpot game. mode and the mode E' flag is set to on (steps S3010 and S3011), so when the time saving mode ends and the mode A is shifted to mode A (steps S1908 to S1910 in FIG. 49), the mode E' flag is set to on in step S3008. The mode C' flag that is set to , or the mode E' flag that is set to on in step S3010 is set to off.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment changes from mode A to mode C', from mode C' to any one of mode A, mode C' and mode E', and from mode E' to mode C' in the special figure gaming state. Transition to either mode A or mode E'. In other words, after the first hit in mode A, how to continue the time saving mode by winning a type 1 jackpot or a type 2 jackpot in mode 'C' and mode E', which are time saving modes, before falling to mode A due to the end of time saving. It has game nature. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 which is a one-type and two-type mixing machine but has gaming characteristics similar to an ST machine. In addition, in mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be executed alternately by left-handed batters, while in mode E', the second special figure game is basically executed by right-handed batters. In addition, compared to the probability of a type 1 jackpot in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the expectation of a type 2 jackpot due to the operation of the feather accessory device due to a small win in the second special figure game is higher. is high. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in mode E', there is a lower possibility of falling to mode A due to the end of the time-saving mode than in mode C', and as a result, the expectation of a jackpot is advantageous to the player. Since Mode C' and Mode E' have two types of modes with different expectations for continuation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Seventh to Twelfth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the game balls are alternately distributed into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38, which is rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise by the game balls. The gaming machine 10 including the distribution device 35 has been described. On the other hand, the seventh to twelfth embodiments differ from the first embodiment in the configuration of the sorting section of the sorting device. The seventh to twelfth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54.

<Seventh embodiment>
The sorting device of this embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above in that it includes a sorting section that rotates alternately in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction, but the sorting section is made of a solenoid or the like. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise by a drive means (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B), the sorting device 35A of this embodiment includes a sorting member 38A (distributing portion) rotatably fixed directly below the inlet 350. . This distribution member 38A is formed in the shape of a claw, and is rotated by a driving means (not shown) between a right tilted position shown in FIG. 51(A) and a left tilted position shown in FIG. 51(B). dynamically driven. When the distribution member 38A is located at the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51(A), the game balls 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 are guided to the first passage 351 by the distribution member 38A. As a result, the game ball 99 enters the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38A is located at the left tilted position shown in FIG. be guided. As a result, the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 when it receives support from the electric support member 36, and enters the right first starting port 314R when it does not receive support from the electric support member 36. In addition, in the sorting device 35A of this embodiment, in order to prevent the game ball from being hit so that the game ball enters the second passage 352, the sorting device 35A is made opaque, for example. It is preferable to make the distribution member 38A invisible from the outside.

Further, the distributing member 38A may be driven by a driving means so as to rotate alternately between a left tilted position and a right tilted position, for example, at regular intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Conceivable. Of course, the distributing member 38A does not necessarily need to be rotated at a constant period, but may be driven to perform patterned irregular rotation operations, and may be rotated in a plurality of different rotation patterns for a fixed period or an indefinite period. It is also possible to change the operation time by time. For example, the rotation pattern that makes it easier for the ball to enter the first passage 351 and the rotation pattern that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second passage 352 may be changed at regular or irregular intervals. Rotation patterns in which the ball easily enters the first passage 351 include a pattern in which the time for the distribution member 38A to stop at the right tilt position is longer than the time for the distribution member 38A to stop at the left tilt position; A pattern may be considered in which the speed (time) of rotating to the tilted position is slower (longer) than the speed (time) of rotating from the left tilted position to the right tilted position. When using a plurality of rotation patterns in combination, the distribution member 38A is rotated so that the game balls 99 are finally distributed into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 at a theoretical ratio of 1:1. is preferred. However, the distribution member 38A may be rotationally driven so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, it can be configured such that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 in mode C than in mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided near the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by this ball entry sensor, if the distribution member 38A is at the left tilted position, the ball is distributed. While the member 38A is rotated to the right tilted position, it is also possible to rotate the distribution member 38A to the left tilted position when the distribution member 38A is in the right tilted position.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the distribution member 38A is rotated at a predetermined timing by the driving means, the ratio at which the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is temporarily changed. can be biased accidentally or intentionally. This determines whether the game ball 99 is guided to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C. Since the player can enjoy the game while deciding whether or not he or she will win at the second start opening 315, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Eighth embodiment>
In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution part is rotated between the right tilt position and the left tilt position by a driving means such as a solenoid, as in the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. This is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is different from the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment described above in the shape of the distribution section.

As shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B), the sorting device 35B of this embodiment includes a sorting member 38B (distributing portion) rotatably fixed directly below the inlet 350. . This distribution member 38B is formed in a substantially T-shape or anchor shape having a circular arc portion 382B and a shaft portion 383B, and has a right inclined position shown in FIG. 52(A) and a left inclined position shown in FIG. 52(B). It is rotationally driven between the two positions by a driving means (not shown). The distribution member 38B of this embodiment differs from the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above only in shape, and is otherwise similar to the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above. There is an effect similar to that of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. Moreover, the distribution member 38B of this embodiment can be changed in design in the same way as the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above.

Furthermore, the shape of the distribution part that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by being rotated by the driving means is different from the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment shown in 52, and various design changes are possible. For example, the shape may be the same as or similar to the distribution member 38 of the first embodiment described above, and the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment may have a flat plate portion or a bent portion in place of the arc portion 382B. It may be a configuration.

<9th and 10th embodiment>
The sorting device 35 of the ninth and tenth embodiments, as a sorting section, moves the game balls 99 into the first passage 351 by rotating clockwise or counterclockwise when the game balls 99 interfere with each other. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that it includes a rotating body that distributes the rotation to either the second passage 352 or the second passage 352 .

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the sorting section of the sorting device 35C has a cylindrical shape that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. It is configured as a roller 38C (rotating body) and is arranged directly below the introduction port 350.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53(B), in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the sorting section of the sorting device 35D has a windmill that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. 38D, and is arranged directly below the introduction port 350. In the windmill 38D, a rotating body 382D is fixed to be freely rotatable by a nail 381D (fixing part). The end of the nail 381D is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the nail 381D is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since the nail 381D of the wind turbine 38D is capable of plastic change, when the position of the nail 381D deviates from the initial setting position, and furthermore, the position of the rotating body 382D deviates from the initial setting position, the nail 381D is moved to the initial setting position. It becomes possible to return to This makes it possible to improve the deviation in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 381D.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the ninth and tenth embodiments, the rotating bodies such as the roller 38C and the windmill 38D, which freely rotate in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction, are distributed due to the interference of the game ball 99. Since the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, the ratio can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 is Since you can enjoy the game while having to decide which of the two passages 352 it will be guided to, that is, whether the game ball 99 will receive the support of the electric support member 36 and enter the second starting port 315, you can enjoy the game. It can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the sorting section is a rotating body such as the roller 38C or the windmill 38D, the player can check the tendency of the sorting between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individuals between the gaming machines) by the rotating body as the sorting section. It is also possible to read the difference). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls, thereby finding a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 352. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 352, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 352. It becomes possible to obtain.

Note that the configuration of the rotating body as the distribution section is not limited to the cylindrical roller 38C shown in FIG. 53(A) or the windmill 38D shown in FIG. 53(B), and the design can be changed. For example, the rotating body includes a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular prism or a quadrangular prism, a member with a flat cross section such as an elliptical cylinder member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having irregularities on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, and a rotating body having a plurality of wings. It may also be a propeller-shaped member or the like.

Further, the rotating bodies such as the cylindrical roller 38C and the windmill 38D may be configured to be rotatable in clockwise and counterclockwise directions by driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating bodies. In this case, the rotational drive of the rotating body may be alternately switched between a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction at fixed time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotation direction of the rotating body does not necessarily need to be changed at regular intervals, and the rotation direction may be changed at patterned irregular time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotating body so that the game balls 99 are distributed between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical ratio of 1:1. The rotation direction of the rotating body may be changed so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls to 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, the rotating body may be configured to be driven so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 in mode C than in mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided near the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by this ball entry sensor, the rotating body is rotated in the opposite direction to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible.

<Eleventh and twelfth embodiments>
The sorting devices of the eleventh and twelfth embodiments move the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by an immovable and non-rotatable sorting part (fixed sorting part) without rotation or rotation. This differs from the first embodiment described above in that the information is distributed to one of the following.

As shown in FIG. 54(A), the sorting device 35E of the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has an apex 389E directly below the introduction port 350, and distributes as a symmetrical mountain-shaped fixing part 38E. A section is formed. In this mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E, the game balls 99 that have interfered with the top portion 389E or the vicinity thereof are distributed to the left and right, so the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(B), in the sorting device 35F of the gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the apex nail 389F (fixed part) is located directly below the introduction port 350, and the apex nail 389F (fixed part) is arranged in a symmetrical triangular shape. A distribution section is formed by the nails 38F. In this triangular nail 38F, since the game ball 99 that interfered with the apex nail 389F is distributed to the left and right, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Each of the triangular nails 38F has an end driven into the game board 31, with the end being a fixed end and the end opposite to the end being a free end. Moreover, the triangular nail 38F is formed of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 38F can be plastically changed, it becomes possible to return the triangular nail 38F to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 38F deviates from the initial setting position. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular nail 38F.

Furthermore, in the game machine 10 according to the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the distribution part is a fixed distribution part that is immovable and non-rotatable, such as the mountain-shaped fixed part 38E or the triangular nail 38F, so that the game ball 99 is The ratio of distribution to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 is Since you can enjoy the game while having to decide which of the two passages 352 it will be guided to, that is, whether the game ball 99 will receive the support of the electric support member 36 and enter the second starting port 315, you can enjoy the game. It can improve your interest. In addition, if the distribution part is a fixed distribution part that is immovable and non-rotatable, such as a mountain-shaped fixed part 38E or a triangular nail 38F, the player can sort the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the fixed distribution part. It is also possible to read the trends (individual differences between gaming machines). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls, thereby finding a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 352. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 352, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 352. It becomes possible to obtain.

The configuration of the distribution section that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing part 38E shown in FIG. 54(A) and the triangular nail 38F shown in FIG. 54(B). However, the design can be changed. For example, the distribution part may have another symmetrical shape such as a dome-like peak, or it may have four or more square nails (diamond-shaped nails) with the apex nail located directly below the inlet 350. It may be made of nails or one nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical, the distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be biased.

[13th to 29th embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory has a plurality of delay guides 364 extending from the wall portion 361 in an inclined shape with the distal end located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the base end. By providing a plurality of delay guides 364 in a staggered manner, it was possible to ensure a long residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric accessory 36. On the other hand, in the thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is ensured for a long time by a configuration different from that of the first embodiment described above. The thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

<13th to 15th embodiments>
In the above-described first embodiment, the delay part of the electric support member 36, which is a normal electric accessory, extends from the wall part 361 in a staggered manner, and the tip part is located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the base end part. By providing a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 and moving the game balls 99 along a meandering path in the electric support member 36, the residence time of the game balls 99 in the electric support member 36 is ensured for a long time. On the other hand, in the 13th to 15th embodiments, the electric support member is configured to move the game ball 99 along a meandering path by the delay section, as in the first embodiment. However, the configuration of the delay section is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

The thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55(A) to 55(C). Here, FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 55(B) is a plan view of the electric supporting member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. The plan view, FIG. 55(C) is a plan view of the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), in the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364A as a delay part is an equilateral triangle in plan view, and the right side ( The sloped sides are located on the upstream side) and are arranged in a staggered manner throughout. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(B), in the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364B as a delay portion is semicircular in plan view, They are arranged in a staggered manner throughout. In the plurality of delay guides 364A, 364B shown in FIGS. 55(A) and 55(B), the game ball 99 interferes with each delay guide 364A, 364B in the electric support members 36A, 36B, so that the game ball 99 It moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering.

Note that the plurality of delay guides serving as the delay portion are not limited to those having an equilateral triangular or semicircular shape in plan view, and are not particularly limited as long as they have a shape that allows the game ball 99 to meander. For example, the plurality of delay guides may each be formed into a rectangular shape such as an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a trapezoid, or a parallelogram, and arranged in a staggered manner so that the inclined side is located on the right side (upstream side). is formed into a shape with a parabolic or arc-shaped outer periphery such as a quarter circle, half ellipse, or quarter ellipse, and is staggered so that the parabolic or arc-shaped outer periphery is located on the right side (upstream side). It may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 55(C), in the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the delay portion is formed as a meandering groove 364C. Also due to such a meandering groove 364C, the game ball 99 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) in the electric support member 36C while meandering. In addition, the shape of the meandering groove 364C as a delay part is variously possible as long as it is a groove shape that can make the game ball 99 meander.

In this way, in the electric support members 36A to 36C of the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, the game balls 99 are made to meander in the electric support members 36A to 36C, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. By moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side), the residence time of the game balls 99 in the electric support members 36A to 36C can be ensured for a long time. As a result, in the 13th to 15th embodiments, as well as in the first embodiment described above, when the player hits right when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, the electric It becomes difficult to receive support from the support members 36A to 36C. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining an abnormal profit that exceeds the expected profit.

<16th to 29th embodiments>
In the first embodiment described above, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 includes a plurality of inclined portions extending in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361 and having the distal end located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the proximal end. By providing the delay guide 364 and moving the game ball 99 in a meandering path in the electric support member 36, the moving distance of the game ball in the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is increased. was secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the 16th to 29th embodiments, as a delay part of the electric support member, while the game ball is moved linearly in the electric support member, the retention time of the game ball in the electric support member is This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is configured so that it can secure for a long time.

Hereinafter, the 16th to 29th embodiments will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 63. Since the electric support members of these embodiments can also ensure a long residence time of game balls, the above-mentioned The same effects as in the first embodiment are achieved. In other words, when the special figure game state is Mode B or Mode C, if the player hits the right hand, it will be difficult for the player to receive support from the electric support member. It is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit from being obtained in the gaming machine 10 when a player makes a bet.

(16th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 56(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36D of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 56(B) is a sectional view taken along the A1-A1 cutting line in FIG. 56(A). be.

As shown in FIGS. 56(A) and 56(B), in the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364D extending in series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36D. It is being The plurality of linear convex portions 364D extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear convex portion 364D has a horizontal surface 365D and a vertical surface 366D, and has a uniform triangular cross section. In the electric support member 36D of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on this horizontal surface 365D by providing the horizontal surface 365D.

Note that the horizontal surface 365D may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball, a rough surface with large movement resistance is preferable. Here, the rough surface includes a matte surface due to grains, a surface having unevenness due to embossing, etc. Furthermore, the movement resistance of the game ball may be increased by arranging an elastic member on the horizontal surface or by forming the horizontal surface from an elastic material.

Instead of the horizontal surface 365D, the linear convex portion 364D may be provided with a slightly inclined surface whose left side (downstream side) is slightly lower or higher than the right side (upstream side). In this case, if the inclination angle of the slightly inclined surface with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the inclination angle of the electric support member 36D with respect to the horizontal, the delay function will be achieved. preferable. Moreover, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of linear convex portions as delay portions, and one linear convex portion may be provided.

(17th to 19th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 57(A) is a sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36E of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 57C is a sectional view showing the main part of the support member 36F. FIG. 57C is a sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member 36G of the gaming machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment.

The electric support members 36E to 36G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments are different from the electric support members of the sixteenth embodiment in that a plurality of linear convex portions 364E to 364G having horizontal surfaces 365E to 365G are provided. Same as 36D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the linear convex portion 364E of the seventeenth embodiment has an inclined surface 366E instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 57(B), the linear convex portion 364F of the eighteenth embodiment has a horizontal surface 365F, but an arcuate surface 366F is provided in place of the vertical surface 366D of the aforementioned sixteenth embodiment. This embodiment is different from the above-described sixteenth embodiment in that this embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above. Note that the surface that can replace the vertical surface 366D of the electric support member 36D of the sixteenth embodiment is not limited to the inclined surface 366E or the arcuate surface 366F, but may be a surface of another shape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(C), in the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364G are provided adjacent to each other, and horizontal surfaces 365G and vertical surfaces 366G are alternately continuous. This is different from the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. Of course, in the eighteenth embodiment as well, a surface having another shape such as an inclined surface or an arcuate surface may be used instead of the vertical surface 366G.

Note that the linear convex portions 364E, 364F, and 364G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments can also be modified in the same manner as in the sixteenth embodiment described above.

(Twentieth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36H of the gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 58(B) is a sectional view taken along the A2-A2 cutting line in FIG. 58(A). .

The electric support member 36H of the 20th embodiment shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B) differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided as a plurality of linear recesses.

As shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 56(B), in the 20th embodiment, a plurality of linear recesses 364H that extend in series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36H. ing. The plurality of linear recesses 364H extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear recess 364H has a horizontal surface 365H and a vertical surface 366H, and has a uniform triangular cross section. In the electric support member 36H of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on this horizontal surface 365H by providing the horizontal surface 365H. Note that the linear recess 364H may employ surfaces of other shapes in place of the horizontal surface 365H and the vertical surface 366H, as in the aforementioned sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments. Moreover, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of linear recesses as the delay portion, and one linear recess may be provided.

(21st to 26th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 59(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36I of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 59(B) is a perspective view of the electric supporting member 36J of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-second embodiment. A perspective view, FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. 60(B) is an electric supporting member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing the main parts of the support member 36L, FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing the main parts of the electric support member 36M of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 61(B) is the main part of the electric support member 36M of the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the principal part of electric support member 36N of gaming machine 10 concerning this embodiment.

The electric support members 36I to 36N of the twenty-first to twenty-sixth embodiments shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 have the above-mentioned point that the delay portions are provided as a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions 364I to 364N. This is different from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), in the twenty-first embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36I is formed as a plurality of convex portions 364I, and these convex portions 364I are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each convex portion 364I has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36I and a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment (A1-A1 in FIG. 56(A)). It has the same shape as the cross-sectional shape along the cutting line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 59(B), in the 22nd embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364J having a shape similar to that of the above-mentioned 21st embodiment are arranged in an orthorhombic lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, etc.). arranged in an isosceles grid).

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in the twenty-third embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364K are formed in the shape of a square prism, and these convex portions 364K are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. The plurality of convex portions 364K may be formed in a polygonal prism shape other than a rectangular prism shape such as a triangular prism shape or a pentagonal prism shape, or a staggered shape (orthorhombic lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape)). May be placed.

As shown in FIG. 60(B), in the twenty-fourth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364L are formed in the shape of a quadrangular pyramid, and these convex portions 364L are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. The plurality of convex portions 364L may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape other than a quadrangular pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape or a pentagonal pyramid shape, or in an orthorhombic lattice shape (a rhombic lattice shape, a triangular lattice shape, an isosceles lattice shape). May be placed.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364M are formed in a columnar shape, and these convex portions 364M are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364N are formed in a hemispherical shape, and these convex portions 364N are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern.

The plurality of convex portions 364M of the twenty-fifth embodiment and the plurality of convex portions 364N of the twenty-sixth embodiment may be arranged in an orthorhombic lattice shape (a rhombic lattice shape, a triangular lattice shape, an isosceles lattice shape). Further, instead of the plurality of convex portions 364M and the plurality of convex portions 364N, a plurality of convex portions having other shapes having circular bottoms, such as a conical shape or a truncated conical shape, may be discretely arranged.

Note that the plurality of protrusions serving as delay parts do not all have to have the same shape, and may be arranged in combination with a plurality of protrusions of different shapes, or in combination with a linear protrusion or a linear recess. May be placed. Further, the plurality of convex portions serving as the delay portions do not necessarily need to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or may be arranged randomly without regularity.

(27th and 28th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36O of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of the electric supporting member 36P of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG.

The electric support members 36O, 36P of the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B) are provided as a plurality of recesses 364O, 364P in which delay portions are discretely arranged. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), in the electric support member 36O of the twenty-seventh embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364O are formed as delay portions, and these recesses 364O are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each recess 364O has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36O that is the same as the cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment (cut A1-A1 in FIG. 56(A)). It has the same shape as the cross-sectional shape along the line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 62(B), in the electric support member 36P of the twenty-eighth embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364P having the same shape as the recesses 364O of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above are provided as delay portions. They are arranged in a square lattice (diamond lattice, triangular lattice, isosceles lattice).

Note that the shape of the plurality of recesses as the delay portion can be changed in various ways, such as a polygonal columnar shape such as a quadrangular columnar shape, a polygonal pyramidal shape such as a quadrangular pyramidal shape, a cylindrical shape, a hemispherical shape, a conical shape, a truncated conical shape, etc. The bottom surface may be circular.

In addition, the plurality of recesses serving as delay parts do not all have to have the same shape, and may be arranged in combination of a plurality of recesses of different shapes, such as a linear convexity, a linear concavity, and a plurality of convexities. It may be placed in combination with Further, the plurality of recesses serving as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or in a random arrangement with no regularity.

(29th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36Q of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 63(B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line in FIG. 63(A). be.

The electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B) is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the delay portion is provided as a plurality of rotationally driven rollers 364Q. It is different from the form.

As shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B), the electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment includes a plurality of rollers 364Q (five in this embodiment) as a delay section. However, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of rollers 364Q, and at least one roller 364Q is sufficient. Each roller 364Q is arranged such that its rotation axis runs along the lateral direction of the electric support member 36Q (the direction that intersects the moving direction of the game ball 99), and is rotatably supported. Further, each roller 364Q is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction, which is the opposite direction to the moving direction of the game ball, by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Therefore, the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q is subjected to a load toward the right side (upstream side) by interfering with the plurality of rollers 364Q. As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) is reduced, thereby ensuring a long residence time of the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q.

Note that the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball, a rough surface with a large movement resistance is preferable. Here, the rough surface includes a matte surface due to grains, a surface having unevenness due to embossing, etc. Further, an elastic member may be arranged on the outer surface of the roller 364Q, or the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be formed of an elastic material to increase the movement resistance of the game ball.

Further, when the delay section is configured as a roller, it may be configured to apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball 99 via the roller. Thereby, the momentum of the game ball 99 can be reduced by attracting the game ball 99 to the roller. In this case, the roller may be rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction as in the twenty-ninth embodiment, but it may also be configured to be able to freely rotate without being rotationally driven by the driving means.

Further, like the electric support members 36D to 36P of the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments described above, the roller 364Q includes linear convex portions 364D to 364G, a linear concave portion 364H, and a plurality of convex portions arranged in a grid pattern. It is also conceivable to use it in addition to a configuration in which 364I to 364N or recesses 364O and 364P are provided.

[Thirtieth to Thirty-Eighth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. The right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is connected to the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. The case where it is provided in the center of the ball receiving part 391, which is the area directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the first starting port 314R and the first starting port 314R, has been described. On the other hand, the 30th to 38th embodiments differ from the above-described first embodiment in that each of the first starting port and the second starting port is provided. The 30th to 38th embodiments will be individually described below with reference to the drawings.

<Thirtieth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape. Further, since the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from those of the first embodiment described above.

The 30th embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. Here, FIG. 64(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 64(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the electric support member 36R. A perspective view, FIG. 65(A) is a diagram when the electric support member 36R is in a standby state in FIG. 64(A), FIG. 65(B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line in FIG. 65(A), FIG. 66(A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 66(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A4-A4 in FIG. 66(A).

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , a right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is located between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of a ball receiving portion 391 provided in an area directly below the introduction port 350 of the ball. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 is located on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and below the exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 (below the second starting port 315). A standby position that restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 and an operating position that allows the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315. It is possible to move back and forth on the game board 31 between the two.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is provided in the center of a certain ball receiving part 391. That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 are Any of the distributed game balls 99 can be won in the same first starting hole 314. In addition, the second starting port 315 of this embodiment is provided at a position offset to the right from directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, which will be described later, so that the game balls 99 released from the second passage 352 are The ball does not enter the second starting port 315 directly.

As shown in FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B), the electric support member 36R has an inverted shape having a left guiding portion 361R (first portion) and a right guiding portion 362R (second portion). . The left guide portion 361R is located below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and to the left of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315. Therefore, the left guide portion 361R can guide the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 to the right side. The right guide portion 362R extends continuously between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 and the right side of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. . Therefore, the right guide portion 362R can guide the game ball moving from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315. Further, it is preferable to provide the right guide section 362R with a delay section as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, in a gaming state where the electric support member 36R is operated for a short time, if a player hits the ball in a hitting manner (right-handed hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed hitting), a game ball enters the second starting port 315. It becomes difficult to be treated. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is possible to force the player to actively play left-handed hitting.

A penetrating portion 363R is provided between the left guiding portion 361R and the right guiding portion 362R so as to be located above the second starting port 315. This penetrating portion 363R has a notch shape that opens forward, and is formed in a form that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided from the left guiding part 361R can pass through the penetrating part 363R and enter the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 guided from the right guiding part 362R can pass through the penetrating part 363R. The ball can pass through and enter the second starting port 315. Moreover, the electric support member 36R is arranged in the front-rear direction between a standby position that restricts the game ball from entering the second starting port 315 and an operating position that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315. It is possible to move to Movement of the electric support member 36R in the front-rear direction is realized by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Further, although the electric support member 36R has a different shape from the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the operating conditions, operation pattern, etc. are the same as those of the first embodiment. Specifically, in Modes A to Mode C, if the lottery result in the regular lottery is a win, the game ball 99 passing through the first through gate 318 is allowed to enter the second starting port 315 for a short time. In mode D and mode E, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is driven for a long time so that it can enter the second starting port 315 when the lottery result in the lottery with a common figure is a win. . In addition, the electric support member 36R is activated on the condition that the first through gate 318 detects passage of a game ball in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 without performing a lottery per normal figure. It's okay.

As shown in FIGS. 65(A) and 65(B), when the electric support member 36R is in the standby position, the electric support member 36R does not protrude from the game board 31 and is entirely inside the game board 31. Located in Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the first starting port 314 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the left guide portion 361R. Furthermore, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 falls along the game board 31 on the left side of the stage 310 and exits from the out port 317 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guide portion 362R. It is discharged. That is, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36R allows the game ball 99 to enter the first starting port 314 when it is in the standby position, while allowing the game ball 99 to enter the first starting port 314. 2. Entry of the game ball 99 into the starting port 315 is restricted.

As shown in FIGS. 66(A) and 66(B), when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, the electric support member 36R protrudes from the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is guided toward the penetration part 363R by the left guiding part 361R, and the electric support member 36R is activated until the game ball 99 reaches the penetration part 363R. When the ball is in the position, the ball passes through the penetrating portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is guided toward the penetration part 363R by the right guide part 362R, and when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position until the game ball 99 reaches the penetration part 363R. , the ball passes through the penetration portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. That is, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36R allows the restriction of the game ball 99 to the first starting port 314 when it is in the operating position, while restricting the game ball 99 to the second starting port 314. The game ball 99 is allowed to enter the starting port 315. In addition, when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are placed in the second The ball is allowed to enter the starting port 315.

Further, in this embodiment as well, similar to the first embodiment described above, evacuation guiding nails 393 and 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided on the right side of the sorting device 35. The retreat guide nails 393, 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36R in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35. That is, the evacuation guide nails 393, 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right side area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315, so that when the electric support member 36R is opened for a short time. The game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36R.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 when it receives the support of the electric support member 36R by actuating the electric support member 36R, and If the ball cannot receive support, the ball enters the first starting port 314. Therefore, in this embodiment, a state in which the game ball enters the first starting port 314 through the first passage 351, a state in which the game ball 99 enters the first starting port 314 through the second path 352, Three states can be taken, including a state where the game ball enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 or the electric support member 36R. Further, whether the game ball 99 sorted to the second passage 352 enters either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36R is activated. The operating time and frequency of operation depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R, but also game balls that are sorted into the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the ball enters the second starting port 315 of 99 differs, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional gaming machines, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the electric support member 36R of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, not only controls whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of game balls 99 into the second starting port 315, but also controls the Whether or not there is a restriction on entry of game balls 99 passing through the second passage 352 into the first starting port 314 is switched at the same time. Therefore, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R cooperate, so that the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 It is possible to change the ball entry ratio. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), reduce the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of ball entry ratio, and create new games by controlling the operation of the electric support member 36R. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly entertaining and has a unique character.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, like the electric support member 36, the game ball when hitting right-handed passes above the first starting port 314R and enters the second starting port 315. In this case, if the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position at the timing when the game ball passes above the first starting port 314R, there is a possibility that the game ball when hitting right may enter the first starting port 314. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the game ball when hitting right is guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guiding part 362R of the electric support member 36R, the game ball when hitting right is guided to the first starting port 315. It never passes above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the first starting port 314 when hitting right-handed.

Note that the penetrating portion of the electric support member 36R is not limited to a notch shape that opens forward, but may be a through hole that opens only upward and downward without opening in the horizontal direction.

<31st embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip. Further, since the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from those of the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B). Here, FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B) are diagrams showing main parts of the gaming board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. 67(A) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is closed, and FIG. 67(B) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is opened.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , a right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is located between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of a ball receiving portion 391 provided in an area directly below the introduction port 350 of the ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is used for introducing the sorting device 35. It is provided at the center of a ball receiving portion 391 provided in an area directly below the mouth 350. That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 Any of the game balls 99 that are distributed can win a prize in the same first starting hole 314. Further, the second starting port 315 of this embodiment is provided inside the electric tulip accessory device 36S, which will be described later.

The electric tulip accessory device 36S is provided at a position offset to the right from the area directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and includes a housing 367S fixed to the game board 31, a rotatable left and right wing member 3681S, 3682S.

The housing 367S has an upper opening 369S that allows the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S to rotate and the game ball 99 to enter. This upper opening 369S is a part for introducing the game ball 99 into the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and is provided at a position offset to the right from the area directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. That is, the game ball guided to the second passage 352 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 369S. Further, a second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 369S. The second starting port 315 is offset to the right with respect to the second passage 352, similar to the upper opening 369S.

Furthermore, a triangular nail 31S made up of three nails is provided above the upper opening 369S. This triangular nail 31S restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the interior of the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S are closed (see FIG. 67(A)). Note that instead of the triangular nail 31S, the entry of the game ball 99 may be restricted by one nail, or the entry of the game ball 99 may be restricted by something other than the nail. In addition, by reducing the distance between the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S in the closed state, the game ball 99 is transferred to the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed. If entering the ball can be restricted, the triangular nail 31S may be omitted.

On the right side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, a path nail 31M' (guiding part) composed of a plurality of nails is provided through a gap that allows the passage of the game ball 99. The path nail 31M' is provided so as to be inclined downward to the left, and guides the game ball 99 that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side area towards the electric tulip accessories device 36S. Therefore, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S (described later) are opened (see FIG. 67(B)), the game ball 99 is guided by the path nail 31M' and passes through the upper opening 369S to the electric tulip accessory. The game ball 99 is introduced into the device 36S and enters the second starting port 315. On the other hand, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are closed (see FIG. 67(A)), the game ball 99 guided to the dowel 31M' enters the upper opening 369S by the right wing member 3682S. is restricted, passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the dowel 31M', and is discharged from the outlet 317. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

The left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S are rotatable by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the drive means causes the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S to close when closed. state (see FIG. 67(A)) and an open state (see FIG. 67(B)) in which the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are separated. Note that the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the normal electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) is caused by the opening of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of this embodiment. Correspondingly, returning the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to closing the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of this embodiment.

In the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(A), the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S. I can't play the ball. That is, in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is prevented from entering the second starting port 315 by the left wing member 3681S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collided with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S is bounced to the left side and falls into the ball receiving part 391, and is guided to the first starting port 314 by the ball receiving part 391. Win 314. In addition, the game ball 99 that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M' collides with the side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and The ball cannot enter the inside of the device 36S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collided with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M' as described above, and is ejected from the outlet 317. .

In the open state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(B), the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is picked up by the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Then, the prize is won in the second starting port 315. In addition, the game ball 99 that flows down the right side area of the game board 31 and is guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the path nail 31M' bridges between the second starting port 315 and the path nail 31M'. The ball is picked up by the right wing member 3682S, enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and enters the second starting port 315 to win a prize. That is, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are in the closed state, the electric tulip accessory device 36S launches the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the right side area of the game board 31. Any of the game balls 99 are allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, the electric tulip accessory device 36S of this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, not only controls whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of game balls 99 into the second starting port 315, but also controls the distribution of game balls 99. At the same time, whether or not to restrict entry of game balls 99 released from the second passage 352 of the device 35 into the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the sorting device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) cooperate with each other. The ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 can be changed. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), the monotony of the game is reduced based on the three game states with different expected values of ball entry ratio, and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) It is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation. In particular, when configured as the electric tulip accessory device 36S, for example, in a game state where left-handed hitting in which the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31 is encouraged (for example, mode A or mode C), the right side area of the game board 31 is In order to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the game ball is hit right-handed, a delay portion (delay guide 364 of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above) is used. ) is not necessary, and a known electric tulip accessory device 36S can be used. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has the advantage that it is easier to design than the first embodiment described above. In addition, in this embodiment, since only one first starting port 314 is required, one first starting port and one ball entry sensor can be omitted compared to the first embodiment described above. This embodiment is easier to design than the first embodiment, and is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

<Thirty-second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. On the other hand, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a general prize opening with a different function from the first starting opening is provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device. .

The 32nd embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(A). Here, FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(A), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that there is only one first starting port 314; The second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the first embodiment. Note that the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391, which is a region directly below the introduction port 350, similarly to the first embodiment described above. Further, as in the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 is connected in series between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the lower side of the exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It extends and is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 between a standby position and an operating position. Furthermore, below the second passage 352, a general winning a prize opening 313', which has a different function from the first starting opening 314 and the second starting opening 315, is provided instead of the first starting opening. In other words, the electric support member 36 has the general winning opening 313' open in the standby position, and the general winning opening 313' is closed in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36 restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 when the general winning hole 313' is open in the standby position, while in the operating position the general winning hole 313' is closed. Then, the ball is guided to the second starting port 315 and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are The ball enters the starting port 314. On the other hand, when the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 receives the support of the electric support member 36 by actuating the electric support member 36, the ball enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315. If the player is unable to receive support from the player, the ball will be entered into the general winning hole 313'.

Here, the distribution device of the conventional gaming machine distributes the game balls to the first starting section and the second starting section, which has the disadvantage that the game becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the second passage There are three states: a state in which the game ball No. 352 enters the general prize winning port 313', and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. It can take two states. Further, whether the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are entered into the general prize opening 313' or the second starting opening 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and frequency of operation depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate to have a plurality of states, but also the game balls 99 can be distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the ball enters the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the general winning hole 313', thereby providing the gaming machine 10 with novel gaming properties that cannot be realized with conventional gaming machines. Ru. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the first starting port 314 and The ball enters the general winning hole 313' without entering any of the second starting holes 315. On the other hand, in mode C as a latent probability change, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second starting port 315. do. That is, in mode A, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314), and half enter the general prize winning port 313'. In mode C, all the game balls 99 are entered into the starting hole (half of them are the first starting hole 314 and half are the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not executed in mode A is executed, but also the number of special figures that are twice as many as in mode A, based on the number of game balls entering the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability variation), the chances of receiving a jackpot lottery are doubled compared to mode A. In this way, the present embodiment provides a new gaming machine 10 that could not be realized with conventional gaming machines.

Furthermore, if the number of prize balls is different between the first starting hole 314 and the general prize winning hole 313', the increase and decrease of game balls in the special figure game can be made different from that in the first embodiment described above. You can also do it. For example, by making the number of prize balls for the general winning hole 313' larger than the number of prize balls for the first starting hole 314, it is possible to provide a game property in which the number of game balls decreases slowly in the special figure game. On the other hand, by making the number of prize balls for the general winning hole 313' smaller than the number of prize balls for the first starting hole 314, it is possible to provide a game property in which the number of game balls decreases sharply in the special figure game. In this case, by increasing the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game, the game machine 10 can have a rapid increase and decrease in game balls.

<33rd embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Moreover, in the above-mentioned 32nd embodiment, the case where the general prize opening 313' is provided directly under the second passage 352 has been described. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment in that neither the first starting opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly under the second passage of the sorting device. It is different from the form. Note that, in this embodiment, the second starting port is not provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device.

The thirty-third embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(B). Here, FIG. 68(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that there is only one first starting port 314; This embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351, and is also common to the thirty-second embodiment. Further, the second starting port 315 and the electric support member 36 in this embodiment are also common to the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment described above. On the other hand, in this embodiment, neither the first starting opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, there are no winning openings such as a second starting opening or a through gate, which have different functions from the first starting opening and the general winning opening. In this embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is guided to the second starting port 315, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315, as described above. This is common to the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment, but when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game balls 99 in the second passage 352 fall along the game board 31, and the various winning slots This differs from the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment described above in that the winnings are ejected from the out port 317 without winning.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are The ball enters the mouth 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is supported by the electric support member 36 being activated. If it is not possible to receive support, it is discharged from the outlet 317. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the first passage 352. There are three possible states: a state in which the ball is discharged from the out port 317, and a state in which the game ball in the second path 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second path 352 and the electric support member 36. Further, whether the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are ejected from the out port 317 or entered into the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and frequency of operation depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states due to the cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36, but also the game that is sorted to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the game becomes more interesting.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 in the second passage 352 are not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, thereby providing a new gaming experience that cannot be achieved with conventional gaming machines. A gaming machine 10 is provided. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are ejected from the out port 317. Ru. On the other hand, in mode C, which is a latent probability variation, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second starting port 315. be done. That is, in mode A, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314), and half are ejected from the out port 317, while in mode C, All the game balls 99 are entered into the starting hole (half of them are the first starting hole 314 and half of them are the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not executed in mode A is executed, but also the number of special figures that are twice as many as in mode A, based on the number of game balls entering the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability variation), the chance of receiving a jackpot lottery is doubled compared to mode A. In this way, the present embodiment provides a new gaming machine 10 that could not be realized with conventional gaming machines.

In the present embodiment, the game balls that have passed through the second passage 352 are discharged from the outlet 317 when there is no support by the electric support member 36, but the game balls that have passed through the second passage 352 are discharged from the second passage 352 below the sorting device 35. A winning hole may be provided at a remote location so that the game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 can enter the winning hole.

<Thirty-fourth embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby providing access to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the electric support member is slid along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fourth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. Here, FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36T in standby state of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 69(B) is a diagram 69(A), FIG. 70(A) is a diagram showing the essential part when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position in FIG. 69(A), and FIG. ) is a perspective view showing the main part of.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is located between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R, and is located directly under the inlet 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided at the center of the receiving part 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36T is provided on the left side of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36T. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

The electric support member 36T has a plate shape inclined slightly downward to the left, and is movable along the game board 31 in the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36T. Specifically, the electric support member 36T has two positions: a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M'. It is possible to move between That is, the electric support member 36T is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' is closed.

As shown in FIGS. 69(A) and 69(B), when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, that is, the electric support member 36T is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and at the second starting port 315. When located directly above, the electric support member 36T closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36T is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36T and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the electric support member 36T and the dowel 31M' through which the game ball 99 can pass. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the path peg 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36T (second starting port 315) and the path peg 31M', and passes through the out port 317. is discharged from.

As shown in FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B), when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', the electric support The member 36T opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also allows the game ball 99 to enter the second starting port 315 by moving the path nail 31M' to the left. A bridge is provided between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the path nail 31M' to the left side is moved to the second path by the electric support member 36T. The ball moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, a plurality of guard nails 31B (two in this embodiment) as a guard portion are arranged on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. The plurality of nails 31B prevent the game balls 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting opening 315 from jumping over the second starting opening 315 when the electric supporting member 36T is in the operating position. be. That is, when the moving speed is high, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting port 315 collides with the plurality of guard nails 31B without directly entering the second starting port 315. After that, the ball enters the second starting port 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dokugi 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, the dokugi 31M' ' and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the electric support member 36T bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. The game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side with the dowel 31M' toward the second starting port 315 enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be achieved by cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36T, but also the second path 352 and the second Since the ease with which the ball enters the starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional gaming machines, and the interest in the game is improved.

<35th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where winning of game balls 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, in this embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position, which is different from the first embodiment described above. It is different from the form. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 71. Here, FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36U of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36U is provided on the left side of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36U. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 71(A) and 71(B), the electric support member 36U has a plate shape having a pair of walls 361U that protrude upward from the edge in the width direction, and is inclined slightly downward to the left. It is located. The pair of wall portions 361U function as a guide for guiding the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) end 362 to the left side (downstream side) end 363. The electric support member 36U is provided with a rotating shaft 362U, and by inputting rotational force to the rotating shaft 362U from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36U rotates as shown in FIG. 71 in a plan view. (B) Rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the electric support member 36U is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated on a substantially horizontal plane that is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

Further, the electric support member 36U is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is placed in a standby position ( 71(A) and 71(B)) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M' (position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 71(A) and 71(B)). It is possible to move between That is, the electric support member 36U is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' is closed.

When the electric support member 36U is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIGS. When located directly above, the electric support member 36U closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36U is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36U and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the electric support member 36U and the dowel 31M' through which the game ball 99 can pass. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the path peg 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36U (second starting port 315) and the path peg 31M', and passes through the out port 317. is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. The support member 36U opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also allows the game ball 99 to move into the second starting port 315 to move the path nail 31M' to the left. It bridges between the path nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the path nail 31M' to the left side is moved to the second path by the electric support member 36T. The ball moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In this embodiment as well, in the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dokugi 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position, the dokugi 31M' ' and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position, the electric support member 36U bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. The game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side with the dowel 31M' toward the second starting port 315 enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states due to cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36U, but also the second passage 352 and stage 310 Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

Note that the electric support member 36U may be arranged horizontally without being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, and may be configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left may be provided on the surface of the electric support member 36U to promote movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side.

<36th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where winning of game balls 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the electric support member is rotatable in a vertical plane along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. . Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-sixth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36V of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. When in the standby position, FIG. 72(B) shows a case where the electric support member 36V is in an intermediate position between the standby position and the operating position, and FIG. 72(C) shows a case where the electric support member 36V is in the operating position. .

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving part 391.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, although it is omitted in the drawing, there is one first starting port 314, similar to the above-mentioned 34th embodiment and 35th embodiment. A starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Also, in this embodiment, a path nail 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 (not shown) below the variable winning device 316, and the left side of this path nail 31M' and the second starting port 315 are An electric support member 36V is provided so as to be rotatable between the upper part and the upper part. The path nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36V. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

The electric support member 36V is provided with a rotating shaft 362V, and by inputting rotational force to the rotating shaft 362V from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36V moves along the game board 31. It is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in the vertical plane in FIGS. 72(A) to 72(C). Further, the electric support member 36V is rotated in a vertical plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is placed in a standby position ( It is movable between the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(A)) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M' (position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(C)). That is, the electric support member 36V closes the gap between the standby position where the second starting port 315 is closed (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(A)) and the second starting port 315 and the path nail 31M'. It is possible to operate between the operating position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(C)). Note that the electric support member 36V is inclined slightly downward to the left in the standby position and the operating position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 36V. However, the electric support member 36V may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 36V, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. may encourage movement to.

When the electric support member 36V is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 36V closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the game ball 99 from entering the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36V is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support member 36V is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36V and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the electric support member 36V and the dowel 31M' through which the game ball 99 can pass. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the path peg 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36V (second starting port 315) and the path peg 31M', and passes through the out port 317. is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The opening 315 is opened to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and the opening 31M' and the second starting opening 315 are opened so that the game ball 99 that moves the opening 31M' to the left can enter the second starting opening 315. 2 starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving to the left on the path nail 31M' is moved to the left by the electric support member 36V. The ball moves toward the second starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, also in this embodiment, at the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dokugi 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position, the dokugi 31M' ' and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the operating position, the electric support member 36V bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. The game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side with the dowel 31M' toward the second starting port 315 enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36V depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36V, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 can be in a plurality of states depending on the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

In this embodiment, the electric support member 36V has two stopping positions: above the second starting port 315 and to the left of the dowel 31M'; The electric support member 36V may be stopped at the position shown in B) where it stands up. At the position where the electric support member 36V stands up, both the second starting port 315 and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' are opened simultaneously. Therefore, while the game balls 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the second starting port 315, the game balls 99 flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 and the game balls 99 moving the road nails 31M' Entry of the ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted by the upright electric support member 36V. As a result, there is no need to provide an evacuation guiding section such as the evacuation guiding nails 393, 394, and the area to the right of the sorting device 35 can be moved in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the electric support member 36V is opened for a short time. The game ball 99 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36V.

<37th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position, and is rotated from above the second starting port 315. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it has a length extending to the left of the dowel 31M'. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-seventh embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. Here, FIG. 73(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36W in the standby position of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 73(B) is a diagram 73(A) is a perspective view of the main part of the electric support member 36W in FIG. 73(B), FIG. 74(B) is a diagram showing the electric support member 36W in the operating position in FIG. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing a modified example of 36W.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving part 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36W is provided on the left side of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36W. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B), the electric support member 36W is an elliptical plate member in plan view, and has an elliptical through hole 363W and a closing portion 364W. The electric support member 36W has a length extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the dowel 31M', and is arranged so as to be inclined slightly downward to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36W can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the dokugi 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. The electric support member 36W may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to guide the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side. may promote the movement of

The through hole 363W has a shorter diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and allows the game ball 99 to pass therethrough. The through hole 363W is located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and the second starting port 363W is located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. It is formed at a location that can be located directly above 315. Note that the shapes of the electric support member 36W and the through hole 363W are not limited to an ellipse, but may be other shapes such as a circle, an oval, or an oblong rectangle. The closing portion 364W is located above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and is located above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. located in between.

The electric support member 36W is provided with a rotation shaft 362W, and by inputting rotational force from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid to the rotation shaft 362W, the electric support member 36W crosses the game board 31. (on a substantially horizontal plane) in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction of FIG. 73(B). Further, the electric support member 36W is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and while blocking the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, the through hole 363W is rotated at the second starting port 315. and the standby position located between the path nail 31M' (see FIG. 73(B)), and the through hole 363W located directly above the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to open the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is movable between an operating position (see FIG. 74(A)) that bridges between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M'. That is, the electric support member 36W is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' is closed.

When the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, that is, when the closed part 364W of the electric support member 36W is located above the second starting port 315, and the through hole 363W is located adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M', The electric support member 36W closes the second starting port 315 by the closing portion 364W, and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36W is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36W and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W is located at a position where the game ball 99 can pass between it and the dowel 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left by the dowel 31M' passes through the through hole 363W and is ejected from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, that is, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and the closing portion 364W is When located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36W opens the second starting port 315 through the through hole 363W to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also A closing part 364W bridges between the path nail 31M' and the second starting opening 315 so that the game ball 99 moving the 31M' to the left can enter the second starting opening 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the path nail 31M' to the left side is moved to the second path by the electric support member 36W. The ball moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In this embodiment as well, in the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dowel 31M' to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W It passes through, falls between the dowel 31M' and the second starting port 315, and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. Therefore, the game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left toward the second starting port 315 with the dokugi 31M' enter the second starting port 315. The ball is thrown. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operating time and frequency of the electric support member 36W depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36W, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 can be in a plurality of states depending on the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

The electric support member 36W has a through hole 363W', such as a cutout, which is open not only vertically but also partially to the side, as shown in FIG. 74(B), instead of the through hole 363W that is open only vertically. It may be provided.

<38th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is rotatable around a rotation axis inclined with respect to the horizontal direction, and has a length extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M'. , which is different from the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-eighth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. Here, FIG. 75(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36X of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 75(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the electric support member 36X. A perspective view, FIG. 76(A) is a sectional view taken along the A5-A5 section line in FIG. 75(B), FIG. 76(B) is a sectional view taken along the A6-A6 section line in FIG. 75(B), and FIG. A) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, and FIG. 77(B) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member 36X in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36X is provided to the left of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36X. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 75(A), 75(B), 76(A), and 76(B), the electric support member 36X has a first penetrating portion 361X and a second penetrating portion 362X. It has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the dowel 31M', and is arranged in a state where it is inclined slightly downward to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36X can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the dokugi 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. Note that the electric support member 36X may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to guide the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side. may promote the movement of

The first penetrating portion 361X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 361aX and 361bX that face each other, and is open to the left side. The first penetration part 361X is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 by the protruding piece 361aX. (see FIG. 77(A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, it penetrates in the vertical direction, thereby allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second starting port 315 ( (See FIG. 77(B)).

The second penetrating portion 362X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 362aX and 362bX that face each other, and is open to the right side. Further, the second penetrating portion 362X penetrates in a direction perpendicular to the first penetrating portion 361X. Note that the second penetrating portion 362X does not necessarily need to penetrate in a direction orthogonal to the first penetrating portion 362X, but may just penetrate in a direction that intersects with the first penetrating portion 361X. The second penetration part 362X is located in the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M', and penetrates in the vertical direction when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, thereby allowing the second starting The game ball 99 is allowed to pass through the gap between the opening 315 and the path nail 31M' (see FIG. 77(A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the second starting opening is opened by the protruding piece 362aX. 315 and the path nail 31M', the passage of the game ball 99 is restricted (see FIG. 77(B)).

The electric support member 36X is rotatable around a rotation axis extending along a substantially horizontal direction slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41. Further, the electric support member 36X is rotated by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the first penetration portion 361X penetrates in the front-rear direction, thereby blocking the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. On the other hand, there is a standby position (see FIG. 77(A)) where the second penetration part 363W penetrates in the vertical direction between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M', and a state where the first penetration part 361X An operating position in which the second passage 362W of the sorting device 35 penetrates in the vertical direction directly below the second passage 352, while the second penetration part 362W penetrates in the front-rear direction and bridges between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M'. (See FIG. 77(B)). That is, the electric support member 36X has a standby position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. , and an operating position in which the second starting port 315 is opened and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' is closed, as shown in FIG. 77(B). .

As shown in FIG. 77(A), when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the electric support member 36X closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. do. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36X is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36X and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 can pass through the second penetrating portion 362X that penetrates in the vertical direction between the electric support member 36X and the dowel 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the dowel 31M' passes through the second penetration part 362X and is ejected from the out port 317.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(B), when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the electric support member 36X opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also The path nail 31M' and the second starting hole 315 are bridged so that the game ball 99 moving the nail 31M' to the left side can enter the second starting hole 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving to the left on the path nail 31M' is moved to the left by the electric support member 36X. The ball moves toward the second starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315 . In addition, also in this embodiment, at the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dowel 31M' to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball moves through the second passage. It passes through the section 362X, falls between the dowel 31M' and the second starting port 315, and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the first penetration part 361X of the electric support member 36X is between the second starting opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting opening 315 open. In order to bridge this, the game balls 99 that are distributed to the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 with the road nail 31M' are moved through the first penetration part 361X. The ball passes through and enters the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 but exits from the out port 317. There are three possible states in which it is ejected. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The amount of time depends on whether or not the electric support member 36X is operated, and the operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36X depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36X, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 can be in a plurality of states depending on the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the electric support member 36X has a through hole 361X that is open only in the upper and lower sides, instead of the first and second through parts 361X and 362X that are partially open laterally as well as the upper and lower sides. ', 362X' may be provided, and a through-hole which is partially open to the sides as well as the top and bottom may be used in combination with a through-hole which is open only to the top and bottom.

Further, in the 30th to 38th embodiments, one first starting port 314 was provided, but similarly to the first embodiment described above, two first starting ports are provided, and one first starting port 314 is provided. The game ball 99 released from the first passage 351 may be allowed to enter through the starting port, and the game ball 99 released from the second path 352 may be allowed to enter using the other first starting port 314L.

In addition, in the 30th to 38th embodiments, the same configuration as the above-described first embodiment can be changed in the same way as in the above-mentioned first embodiment, and the above-mentioned 2nd to 12th embodiments can be changed. It is also possible to adopt configurations of the configurations (see FIGS. 26 to 54) and configurations of modifications thereof. For example, in the 30th to 37th embodiments, the roller 38C of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 53(A)) and the windmill 38D of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 53(B)) are used as the distribution parts. A rotating body such as, a mountain-shaped fixing part 38E of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 54(A)), a triangular nail 38F of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53(A)), and a top nail of the triangular nail 38F A fixed distribution part such as a single nail of a chisel can be suitably employed. When such a rotating body or fixed distribution unit is used as the distribution unit, the player can read the tendency of distribution between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution unit (individual differences between gaming machines). It is also possible. As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls, thereby finding a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 352. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 352, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 352. It becomes possible to obtain.

[Summary of the invention]
Hereinafter, a summary of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals, etc. may be added to the description for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
a first prize opening (314L) into which game balls sorted into the first passageway (351) can enter;
a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can be inserted and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314L);
detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is opened in the second prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entry of the ball into the second winning hole (315) is permitted, to a second position where the ball passing through the second passageway (352) is allowed to enter the second prize opening (315). a movable accessory member (36) that moves to the (operating position);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to Appendix A1, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of the operation, entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls sorted into the second passage are restricted from entering the second prize opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where it is not in operation; When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the ratio of balls entering the second prize opening can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, realize new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member, and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A2]
A supplementary note characterized by further comprising a third winning hole (314R) into which the game balls sorted into the second passageway (352) can enter, and which has the same function as the first winning hole (314L). The gaming machine described in A1.

In the game machine according to appendix A2, the game balls are sorted by the sorting device into a first starting hole and a third starting hole having the same function as the first starting hole. As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the standby position, the game ball is entered into different winning holes (first winning hole and second winning hole) with the same function, making the game more monotonous. This makes it possible to realize new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member and to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A3]
A supplementary note characterized in that the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is longer when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied than when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in A1 or Appendix A2.

[Appendix A4]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
It is better to launch a game ball into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318), and it is better to hit the game ball into the right side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than when hitting a ball; and a first game state in which it is more advantageous for the player to hit a game ball into the right side area so that passage of the game ball is detected by the other sensing means (319); 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41),
The first condition is that the game is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A3 and Appendix A4, the ease with which the game ball enters the third prize opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied is determined. are considered to be different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is met, even if the movable accessory member is operated, it may be difficult for the game ball launched to the right area to enter the third winning hole, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease with which the game ball enters the third winning hole. As a result, in a situation where left-handed hitting, in which the game ball is hit to the left side of the game board, is encouraged (for example, in the first game state), if the player hits the game ball to the left, which is the right-handed hitting, in the left side area of the game board, the player is at a disadvantage. Therefore, in a situation where left-handed playing is encouraged, it is possible to suppress the game from being played by right-handed players and encourage the game to be played by left-handed players.

[Appendix A5]
The second winning a prize opening (315) is configured such that the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning a prize opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix A4, characterized in that the gaming ball to be detected is placed at a position that is longer than the time required for the ball to enter the second prize opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the other detection means to enter the second winning hole. The time required to hit the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched to the left side of the game board can enter the second winning slot, while a game ball launched to the right side is difficult to enter the third winning slot. becomes possible. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batted in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix A6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second prize opening (315). ) is allowed to enter the second prize opening (315), and the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) is restricted from entering the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine described in appendix A4 or appendix A5.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second winning hole when the player hits right-handed in the first game state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed batting is encouraged in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. becomes possible.

[Appendix A7]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is in the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A4 to A6, characterized in that the time is for allowing a ball to be thrown into the machine.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A6, by hitting right in the second gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the second winning hole. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix A8]
The movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S) are
At the first position (standby position), entry of the game ball into one of the second winning hole (315) and the third winning hole (314R) is restricted, and the one Allowing the game ball to enter the other winning hole (315) different from the winning hole (314R),
In the second position (operating position), the game ball is allowed to enter the one winning hole (314R), and the game ball is restricted from entering the other winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the game ball is allowed to enter one of the second winning hole and the third winning hole depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. A state in which the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and a state in which the entry of a gaming ball into one winning opening is restricted while the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted. Any of the permissible states is achieved. In this way, in the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into one winning opening, but also prevents the entry of the gaming ball into the other winning opening. Allow or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A9]
The movable accessory member (36) is
An opening/closing part (362) that brings the third winning opening (314R) into the open state in the first position (standby position) and brings the third winning opening (314R) into the closed state in the second position (operating position). )and,
Continuing from the opening/closing part (362), restricting the movement of the gaming ball to the right of the third prize opening (314R) toward the opening/closing part (362) in the first position (standby position), a guide part (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the third prize opening (314R) toward the opening/closing part (362) in the second position (operating position);
The gaming machine according to appendix A2, characterized in that it has the following.

[Appendix A10]
The opening/closing part (362) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is allowed to enter the third winning opening (314R), and the ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening (315). limit the ball,
In the second position (operating position), entry of the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) into the third winning opening (314R) is restricted, and entry into the second winning opening (315) is restricted. allow the ball,
The guide part is
in the first position (standby position), restricting the movement of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362);
The game machine according to appendix A9, characterized in that, in the second position (operating position), a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is allowed to move toward the opening/closing part (363). .

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A9 and Appendix A10, the movable accessory member has an opening/closing part that can open and close the third winning opening and a guide part that moves the game ball on the right side of the third winning opening toward the opening/closing part. With the simple configuration of providing a single movable accessory member, game balls can be won from a plurality of routes to the third winning hole. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A11]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first part (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the left side of the second winning opening (315), and a first part (361R) that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the left side of the second winning opening (315). (315), and a second portion (362R) for causing a game ball to enter the second prize opening (315) from the right side of the gaming machine according to appendix A1.

[Appendix A12]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), allowing a game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first starting port (314);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) to enter the second prize opening (315), and The game machine according to appendix A11, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A11 and Appendix A12, the movable accessory member has a first part that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening from the left side of the second winning opening, and a first part that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening from the right side of the second winning opening. With the simple configuration of providing a second part for allowing the ball to enter the second winning port, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning port from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A13]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the second prize opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to Appendix A11 or A12, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, due to the simple structure of providing a penetration part between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be It is possible to move the ball to the penetrating part and enter the second winning hole.

[Appendix A14]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) have their tips close to each other at the first position (standby position), and are close to each other at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the leading end portions of the gaming machines are spaced apart from each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or restrict entry of game balls into the second winning opening and allow or restrict entry of gaming balls into the first winning opening.

[Appendix A15]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passageway (352), and is located at the first position (standby position). The game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) interfere with each other, causing the game balls to move toward the first prize opening (314), and at the second position (operating position), the second passageway (352) is moved. The game machine according to appendix A14, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second prize opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are placed in the second passage by the sorting device as the first movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated, entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to appendix A15, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the game ball distributed to the second path is transferred to the second prize opening by the movable accessory member. Allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening are performed at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A16]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) in response to the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When in the second position (operating position), any of the game balls passing through the second path (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area enters the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A9, characterized in that entering balls are allowed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board are also thrown into the second prize opening by the movable accessory member. can be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix A17]
A supplementary note characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) is provided above the movable accessory member (36), and further includes a retreat guiding part (393, 394) that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A16.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17, a retreat guiding part is provided above the movable accessory member to guide the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix A12, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and it is encouraged to launch the game machine to the left side area of the game board, the second prize opening in the movable accessory member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the standby position, which is not recommended. When this is done, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A18]
The retreat guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails on the side farther from the second winning opening (315) are located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in appendix A11.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A18, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Furthermore, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guiding section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retreat guide part, and to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix A19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball with the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A18, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying the time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A19, a delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even if a game ball is received by the movable accessory member due to a player hitting right in a game state where the movable accessory member has a short operating time and left-handed hitting is encouraged, the game ball is It is possible to secure a long time until the money reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the first position, which is not encouraged. In the case of moving in the opposite direction, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A20]
The gaming machine according to appendix A19, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves the game ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix A21]
The delay portions (364D to 364H) include one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix A19 or appendix A20.

[Appendix A22]
According to any of Appendix A19 to Appendix A21, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to appendix A22, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A22 and Appendix A23, the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix A24]
From appendix A19, wherein the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any of appendix A23.

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to appendix A24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix A26]
The game machine according to appendix A24 or A25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices A24 to A26, the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, which not only improves the design of the gaming machine, but also improves the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory member. Since it becomes easier to draw attention to the game, the interest in the game increases.

[Appendix A27]
Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state when a predetermined state is established among the plurality of gaming states,
The gaming state transition means (41) operates in a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and The gaming machine according to appendix A2, characterized in that it includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix A27 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix A27, it is possible to create a new gaming experience with improved gaming experience based on three gaming states with different expected values of the ratio of balls entering the second prize opening. become.

[Appendix A28]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side area is likely to enter the first winning hole (314L) and the third winning hole (314R), while it is difficult to enter the second winning hole (315),
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter any of the first winning hole (314L), the second winning hole (315), and the third winning hole (314R),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area enters the first winning opening (314L), the second winning opening (315), and the third winning opening (314R) compared to the gaming ball launched into the right area. Easy to get hit,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched to the right side area is less likely to enter the first winning hole (314L) and the third winning hole (314R), and is less likely to enter the second winning hole than the game ball hit to the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix A27, characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the mouth (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole is determined by the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. different. Thereby, three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A29]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to hit the game ball into the left side area so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and the other detection means (319) detects the game ball. is advantageous for the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the right side area so that the passage of the ball is detected;
In the fifth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the right side area so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine according to appendix A28, characterized in that the gaming machine is more advantageous to the player than the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29, the movable accessory member is activated when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, thereby allowing the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening. Make it. By utilizing whether or not the movable accessory member is activated, each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio to the third winning hole are different.

[Appendix A30]
The first winning hole (314L) and the third starting hole (314R) shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. Providing an opportunity to make the first special judgment (jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to
The second winning hole (315) makes a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A29, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation that a determination result that will cause the transition to the second special game will be obtained than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30, the game machine shifts to the second special game that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball into the first starting port and the third starting port and by entering the game ball into the second starting port. Expectations (functions) are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different expectations for transition to the second special game. Thereby, the gameplay is enhanced and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix A31]
The third gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first prize opening (314L) and the second starting opening (315). ) and the ball is difficult to enter the third prize opening (314R),
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) enter the first winning opening (314R) and the second winning opening (315). It is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning hole (314R),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first prize opening (314L), and are likely to enter the second prize opening (314L). 315) and the third winning hole (314R) is difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second passageway (352) by the sorting device (35) enter the first winning opening (314R) and the third winning opening (314L). It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second prize opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passageway (352),
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314L) and the third winning hole (314R), and the game ball passes through the specific area by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to appendix A30, characterized in that a ball is likely to be entered into the second winning hole (315) upon detection of a game.

[Appendix A32]
In the third game state and the fourth game state, the game ball launched into the right side area enters the first winning hole (314L), the second winning hole (315), and the third winning hole (314R). The gaming machine according to appendix A31, characterized in that it is difficult for a ball to be hit in any of the above.

[Appendix A33]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first prize opening (314L), and are likely to enter the second prize opening (314L). 315) and the third winning hole (314R) is difficult to enter,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) enter the first prize opening (314L) and the third prize opening (314R). A supplementary note characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second prize opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passageway (352). A31 or the gaming machine described in Supplementary note A32.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A31 to Appendix A33, by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member, it is possible to create three different expected values of the ball entry ratio in the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole. A gaming state is achieved. Therefore, there are a third and fourth game state in which the game ball is launched into the left area and the game is played using the sorting device, and a game state where the game ball is launched into the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A fifth game state that progresses can be realized. As a result, the game can be varied, and at the same time, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix A34]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are different from the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special judgment and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A30 to A33, characterized in that in the special determination, there is a high probability that the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) is determined.

[Appendix A35]
A first special symbol game in which the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314L) and the third starting hole (314R) is displayed by a first special symbol. A first special symbol display section (371) to be executed;
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the Shift to special gaming state,
Provided that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of game balls into the first winning hole (314L) and the third winning hole (314R) causes the transition to the special gaming state. , after the end of the special game in the special game state, transition to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C');
Provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special The gaming machine according to appendix A34, characterized in that the game enters the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game ends.

According to the gaming machines according to appendix A34 and appendix A35, for example, there is a gaming feature that has a barrier before transitioning to a special gaming state where a large amount of gaming value is given, a gaming feature that has a plurality of substantially variable continuation rates, etc. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines with diverse gaming properties.

[Appendix A36]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
a first determination result (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
a second determination result (normal jackpot) that is transferred to a gaming state other than the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
The gaming machine according to appendix A35, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

[Appendix A37]
The gaming state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination that the transition to the special gaming state is to be made. Shift to the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches an upper limit number in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to appendix A36, characterized by:

In the gaming machines according to appendices A36 and A37, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result shifts to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the fifth determination result changes after the end of the special game. and a second determination result for transitioning to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Furthermore, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to be shifted to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. It has three gaming states, 3rd to 5th gaming states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different, and the first winning hole or the third winning hole has three gaming states. Provided that the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, after the special game ends, the game will be transferred to the fourth gaming state and will be transferred to the second winning hole. The fifth game state is entered after the end of the special game on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball causes the player to enter the special game state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the first to the third gaming state can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. According to the gaming machines according to appendices A36 and A37, the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is entered in stages through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, enter the game ball into the second prize opening in the special game determination, and 2. The result of the special determination must be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in stages.

[Appendix A38]
When the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, the gaming state transition means (41) is configured to change the gaming state to the first special judgment or the second special judgment triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment. The gaming machine according to appendix A37, characterized in that the first gaming state (mode A) is entered after the special game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A38, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state shift to the third gaming state after the end of the special game. The percentage of stay in the state is lower. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, not only can you expect the game ball to enter the second prize opening with the support of the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This mode has a high probability of being determined to be shifted to. Therefore, because the percentage of stays in the fourth and fifth gaming states is low, the gameplay tends to fall into the third gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharp transition between gaming states, and the gaming value that the player can obtain. It is also possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of features.

[Appendix A39]
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment in the third gaming state (mode A) is to move to the special gaming state, the first special judgment or the second special judgment a transition number setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state with the transition to the special gaming state based on the first time;
The game state transition means (41) is characterized in that the game state is transitioned to the third game state (mode A) after the special game state ends for the upper limit number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine described in appendix A35.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A39 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different, and the transition upper limit The transition to the special gaming state from the first win continues until the number of hits. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole or the third winning hole is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, after the special game ends, the fourth After the special game ends, the fifth game is played on the condition that the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is the one that causes the transition to the special game state. state. That is, the destination of the game state after the special game changes depending on whether the ball enters the first winning hole or the third winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in the remaining opportunities to transition to the special gaming state after the first win, the gameplay is determined by how to transition to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, while leaving as many opportunities to transition to the special gaming state. We can provide gaming machines with

[Appendix A40]
The gaming state transition means (41) determines that the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is an upper limit number in the fourth gaming state (mode C') or the fifth gaming state (mode E'). The gaming machine according to appendix A35, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) when the gaming machine reaches the mode A.

[Appendix A41]
further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special Shifting to the fourth gaming state (mode C') after the end of the special game on the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering part,
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C') is to cause a transition to the special gaming state, in the special game in the special gaming state, the The gaming machine according to appendix A40, characterized in that, on the condition that a game ball enters the special ball entry section (824), the game enters the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the end of the special game. .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40 and Appendix A41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. Ru. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can be applied to an ST machine including a so-called V-ST machine. Furthermore, in the gaming machines according to appendices A40 and A41, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, first, after shifting to the fourth gaming state, play the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reach the upper limit number. It is necessary that the result of the special determination will cause the player to move to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, how quickly can the second special symbol game obtain a determination result for shifting to the special gaming state and shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player? It has a game property of whether to let the player play or not, and further determines how many special game states can be transitioned to before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after transitioning to the fifth game state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game feature where you decide whether to win the result or not.

[Appendix A42]
A first special symbol game in which the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314L) or the third winning hole (314R) is displayed using a first special symbol. A first special symbol display section (371) to be executed;
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
When the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small win) different from the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state. When activated, a game ball can enter the game ball, and the game state transition means (41) grants the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) by the game ball entering the special game ball. a wing accessory device (83) having a spherical portion (833);
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
Transitioning to the special gaming state triggered by the result of the first special determination or the second special determination being a transition to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot);
The fourth gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. to move to
Based on the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) that is granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry section (833), after the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed. Shifting to the special gaming state,
The fifth gaming state (mode E) is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E) after the special game in the special gaming state, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special ball entering section (833), ends. The gaming machine described in appendix A34.

[Appendix A43]
The game state transition means (41), when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth game state or the fifth game state, The gaming machine according to appendix A42, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A42 and A43, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is one that causes the transition to a special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entry section. By doing so, the right to move to the special gaming state is granted (type 2 jackpot), and the player moves to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can also be applied to a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine.

[Appendix A44]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. normal determination means (41) for normally determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position). ),
Compared to the third gaming state (mode A), the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are determined by the normal determining means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A29 to A41, characterized in that in the normal determination, there is a high probability that it will be determined that the movable accessory member (36) is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44, the probability that the movable accessory member is determined to be activated in the normal judgment by the normal judgment means is different between the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state. Thereby, three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A45]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') is different from the third gaming state (mode A) in that the detecting means (318) detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendices A27 to A44, characterized in that the time from detection to the start of the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45, in the fourth gaming state, compared to the third gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage. It takes a short time to complete the process. Thereby, three game states, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A46]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is different from the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') in that the movable accessory member (36) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A27 to A45, characterized in that the operating time is long.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth gaming state than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Thereby, three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A47]
The game machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A40, wherein the distribution section (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A47, the sorting section of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual differences between gaming machines) by the distribution section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and through trial and error, find the launch position of the game ball that makes it easier for the game balls to be distributed to the second aisle. It is fun to find the launching position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball is distributed from those game machines to the second passage. It becomes possible to enjoy searching for easy-to-understand gaming machines.

[Appendix A48]
The gaming machine according to appendix A47, wherein the distribution section (38D, 38F) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed section (381D, 389F).

In the game machine according to appendix A48, the determination is made by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed part. Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to appendix A48, wherein the fixed part (381D, 389F) has one end fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix A50]
The gaming machine according to appendix A49, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A48 to A50, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A49 to Appendix A51, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part is plastically changeable, so that when the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial setting position, the fixed part is returned to the initial setting position. becomes possible. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix A52]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
Supplementary notes A48 to A51, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail at the top and a vertical line passing through this one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A52, by adjusting the nail at the top, it is possible to improve the bias in the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix A53]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first path (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second path (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A48 to A52, characterized in that the game machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to appendix A53, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix A55]
The sorting section (38C) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first passageway (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, toward the second passageway (352). The game machine according to appendix A54, characterized in that the game machine is a roller fixed to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A54 and Appendix A55, a rotating body such as a freely rotatable roller is used as the distribution part, and this rotating body also prevents accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with the rotating body. determined by Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix B1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
a first prize opening (314) into which game balls distributed to the first passageway (351) and game balls distributed to the second passageway (352) can enter;
a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can be inserted and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314);
a detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is opened in the second prize opening (315). ) is movable to move from a first position where entry of the ball into the second passageway (352) is restricted to a second position where entry of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) into the second prize opening (315) is permitted. Accessory component (36);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of the operation, entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls sorted into the second passage are restricted from entering the second prize opening when the movable accessory member is in the standby position where it is not in operation; When the accessory member is in the operating position, the game ball is allowed to enter the second prize opening. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole can be variably changed. This reduces the monotony of the game in a gaming machine where both the game balls distributed to the first passage and the game balls distributed to the second passage can enter the same first prize slot, and the game balls distributed to the second passage are movable. It is possible to realize new gameplay according to the control mode of the operation of the accessory member and to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix B2]
A supplementary note characterized in that the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is longer when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied than when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in B1.

[Appendix B3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
It is better to launch a game ball into the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and it is better to launch the game ball into the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball. a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than when hitting a ball; and a first game state in which it is better to hit a game ball into the right side area so that passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319); 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41),
The first condition is that the game is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B2 and Appendix B3, the ease with which the game ball enters the second prize opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied is determined. are considered to be different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is met, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and the game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the second winning hole, etc., depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease with which the game ball enters the second winning hole. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batted in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix B4]
The second winning a prize opening (315) is configured such that the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning a prize opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The game machine according to appendix B3, characterized in that the game ball to be detected is placed at a position that is longer than the time required for the ball to enter the second prize opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the other detection means to enter the second winning hole. The time required to hit the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched to the left side of the game board can enter the second winning slot, while a game ball launched to the right side is difficult to enter the second winning slot. becomes possible. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix B5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second prize opening (315). ) is allowed to enter the second prize opening (315), and the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) is restricted from entering the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine described in Appendix B3 or B4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second winning hole when the player hits right-handed in the first game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed batting is encouraged in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. becomes possible.

[Appendix B6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is in the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B3 to B5, characterized in that the time is for allowing a ball to be entered.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B6, by hitting right in the second gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the second winning hole. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix B7]
The movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S) are
At the first position (standby position), allowing the game ball to enter the first winning hole (314) and restricting the game ball from entering the second winning hole (315),
In the second position (operating position), entry of game balls into the first winning hole (314) is restricted, and acceptance of game balls into the second winning hole (315) is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, the game ball is allowed to enter one of the second winning hole and the third winning hole depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. A state in which the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and a state where the entry of a gaming ball into one winning opening is restricted while the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted. Any of the permissible states is achieved. In this way, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of a game ball into one winning opening, but also prevents the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening. Allow or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B8]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315), and a first portion (361R) that allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B7, further comprising a second portion (362R) for causing a game ball to enter the second prize opening (315) from the right side of the second winning hole (315). .

[Appendix B9]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), allowing a game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first starting port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) to enter the second prize opening (315), and The gaming machine according to appendix B8, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8 and Appendix B9, the movable accessory member has a first part that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening from the left side of the second winning opening, and a first part that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening from the right side of the second winning opening. With the simple configuration of providing a second part for allowing the ball to enter the second winning hole, it is possible to make the game ball enter the second winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the second prize opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to Appendix B8 or B9, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10, due to the simple configuration of providing a penetration part between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be It is possible to move the ball to the penetrating part and enter the second winning hole.

[Appendix B11]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) have their tips close to each other at the first position (standby position), and are close to each other at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix B7, wherein the leading end portions of the gaming machines are spaced apart from each other.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B11, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning hole and allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning hole at the same time.

[Appendix B12]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passageway (352), and is located at the first position (standby position). The game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) interfere with each other, causing the game balls to move toward the first prize opening (314), and at the second position (operating position), the second passageway (352) is moved. The gaming machine according to appendix B11, characterized in that the passing gaming balls interfere with each other to move the gaming balls toward the second prize opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are placed in the second passage by the sorting device as the first movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated, entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, the sorting device and the movable accessory member work together, so that the game balls sorted into the second path are transferred to the second prize opening by the movable accessory member. Allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the first prize opening are performed at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B13]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) in response to the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passageway (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B13, not only the gaming balls passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming balls launched to the right side area of the gaming board are also thrown into the second prize opening by the movable accessory member. can be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix B14]
A supplementary note characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) is provided above the movable accessory member (36), and further includes a retreat guiding part (393, 394) that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B14, a retreat guide part is provided above the movable accessory member to guide the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix B14, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and it is encouraged to launch the game machine to the left side area of the game board, the second winning hole in the movable accessory member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the standby position, which is not recommended. When this is done, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B15]
The retreat guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails on the side far from the second winning opening (315) are located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in appendix B14.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B15, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Furthermore, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guiding section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retreat guiding part, and to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix B16]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball with the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B15, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying the time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B16, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning hole. Therefore, for example, even if a game ball is received by the movable accessory member due to a player hitting right in a game state where the movable accessory member has a short operating time and left-handed hitting is encouraged, the game ball is It is possible to secure a long time until the money reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the first position, which is not encouraged. In the case of moving in the opposite direction, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B17]
The gaming machine according to appendix B16, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves the game ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix B18]
The delay portions (364D to 364H) include one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix B16 or B17.

[Appendix B19]
According to any of appendices B16 to B18, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix B20]
The gaming machine according to appendix B19, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix B17 to Appendix B20, the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix B21]
From appendix B16, wherein the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any of Appendix B20.

[Appendix B22]
The gaming machine according to appendix B21, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction that is opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to appendix B21 or B22, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices B21 to B23, the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, which not only improves the design of the gaming machine, but also improves the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory member. Since it becomes easier to draw attention to the game, the interest in the game increases.

[Appendix B24]
Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state when a predetermined state is established among the plurality of gaming states,
The gaming state transition means (41) operates in a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and The gaming machine according to appendix B1, characterized in that it includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix B24 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix B24, it is possible to create new gameplay with improved gameplay based on the three gaming states with different expected values of the percentage of balls entering the second prize opening. become.

[Appendix B25]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side area is likely to enter the first winning hole (314), but it is difficult to enter the second winning hole (315),
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is more likely to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315) compared to the gaming ball launched into the right area,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right side area is less likely to enter the first prize opening (314), and is more likely to enter the second winning opening (315) than the game ball launched into the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix B24, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B25, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. Thereby, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B26]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left area so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and the other detection means (319) detects the game ball. This is advantageous for the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the right side area so that the passage of the ball is detected,
In the fifth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the right side area so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, and the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine according to appendix B25, characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player than when the game ball is launched into the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B26, the movable accessory member is activated when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, thereby allowing the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening. Make it. By utilizing whether or not the movable accessory member is activated, each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole are different.

[Appendix B27]
The first winning hole (314R) makes a first special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The second winning hole (315) makes a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B26, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation that a determination result that will cause the transition to the second special game will be obtained than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B27, the degree of expectation (function) that the player will be transferred to the second special game that is advantageous when the game ball enters the first starting port and the game ball enters the second starting port. are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratios between the first winning hole and the second starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different expectations for transition to the second special game. Thereby, the gameplay is enhanced and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix B28]
The third gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first prize opening (314L), and the second starting opening (3145). ) is difficult to hit,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), 315) is difficult to hit,
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left side area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), and are likely to enter the second winning hole (314). 315) is difficult to hit,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first prize opening (314), and the detection means (318) When it is detected that the game ball passes through the second passageway (352), the ball is likely to enter the third prize opening (315),
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first prize opening (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix B27, characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second winning hole (315).

[Appendix B29]
The third gaming state and the fourth gaming state are characterized in that the game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine described in appendix B28.

[Appendix B30]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315). It is difficult to be
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first prize opening (314) and are detected by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix B28 or B29, characterized in that a ball is likely to enter the second prize opening (315) when a game ball is detected to pass through the second passageway (352). .

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B28 to Appendix B30, by adopting a sorting device together with a movable accessory member, three gaming states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different are realized. Ru. Therefore, there are a third and fourth game state in which the game ball is launched into the left area and the game is played using the sorting device, and a game state where the game ball is launched into the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A fifth game state that progresses can be realized. As a result, the game can be varied, and at the same time, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix B31]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are different from the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special judgment and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B27 to B30, characterized in that in the special determination, there is a high probability that the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) will be determined.

[Appendix B32]
A first special symbol display unit (1) that executes a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) using a first special symbol; 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the Shift to special gaming state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special After the end of the game, transition to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'),
Provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special The gaming machine according to appendix B31, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game ends.

According to the gaming machines according to appendix B31 and appendix B32, for example, there is a gaming feature that has a barrier before transitioning to a special gaming state where a large amount of gaming value is given, a gaming feature that has a plurality of substantially variable continuation rates, etc. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of gaming features.

[Appendix B33]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
a first determination result (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
a second determination result (normal jackpot) that is transferred to a gaming state other than the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
The gaming machine according to appendix B32, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

[Appendix B34]
The gaming state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination that the transition to the special gaming state is to be made. Shift to the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches an upper limit number in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to appendix B33, characterized by:

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B33 and Appendix B34, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result is shifted to the fifth gaming state after the special game ends, and the fifth game state is changed after the special game ends. and a second determination result for transitioning to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Furthermore, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to be shifted to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. It has three gaming states, 3rd to 5th gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole. Provided that the result of the first special judgment is to move to the special gaming state, after the special game ends, the fourth gaming state will be entered, and the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening will be the trigger. The fifth gaming state is entered after the special game ends, provided that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the first to the third gaming state can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. According to the gaming machine according to appendices B33 and B34, the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is entered in stages through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, enter the game ball into the second prize opening in the special game determination, and 2. The result of the special determination must be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to shift to a gaming state advantageous in stages.

[Appendix B35]
When the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, the gaming state transition means (41) is configured to change the gaming state to the first special judgment or the second special judgment triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment. The gaming machine according to appendix B34, characterized in that the first gaming state (mode A) is entered after the special game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B35, if the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state shift to the third gaming state after the special game ends. The percentage of stay in the state is lower. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, not only can you expect the game ball to enter the second prize opening with the support of the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This mode has a high probability of being determined to be shifted to. Therefore, since the percentage of stays in the fourth and fifth gaming states is low, the gameplay tends to fall into the third gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharp transition between gaming states, and the gaming value that the player can obtain. It is also possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of features.

[Appendix B36]
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment in the third gaming state (mode A) is to move to the special gaming state, the first special judgment or the second special judgment a transition number setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state with the transition to the special gaming state based on the first time;
The game state transition means (41) is characterized in that the game state is transitioned to the third game state (mode A) after the special game state ends for the upper limit number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine described in appendix B32.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B36 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and also has the first winning state up to the upper limit number of transitions. The transition to the special gaming state continues. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole causes the transition to the special gaming state, the transition to the fourth gaming state is made after the end of the special game. , on the condition that the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, after the end of the special game, the game state is shifted to the fifth gaming state. . That is, the transition destination of the game state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball entering the first winning hole or the second winning hole is triggered. Therefore, in terms of opportunities to transition to the remaining special gaming states after the first win, the gameplay is determined by how to transition to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, while leaving as many opportunities to transition to the special gaming state. We can provide gaming machines with

[Appendix B37]
The gaming state transition means (41) determines that the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is an upper limit number in the fourth gaming state (mode C') or the fifth gaming state (mode E'). The gaming machine according to appendix B32, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) when the game mode reaches .

[Appendix B38]
further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special Shifting to the fourth gaming state (mode C') after the end of the special game on the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering part,
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C') is to cause a transition to the special gaming state, in the special game in the special gaming state, the The gaming machine according to appendix B37, characterized in that, on condition that a game ball enters the special ball entry section (824), the game enters the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the end of the special game. .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B37 and Appendix B38, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. Ru. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can be applied to an ST machine including a so-called V-ST machine. Furthermore, in the gaming machines according to appendices B37 and B38, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, first, after shifting to the fourth gaming state, play the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number. It is necessary that the result of the special determination will cause the player to move to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, how quickly can the second special symbol game obtain a determination result for shifting to the special gaming state, and shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player? It has a game property of whether to let the player play or not, and further determines how many special game states can be transitioned to before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after transitioning to the fifth game state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game feature where you decide whether to win the result or not.

[Appendix B39]
A first special symbol display unit (1) that executes a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) using a first special symbol; 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
When the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small win) different from the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state. When activated, a game ball can enter the game ball, and the game state transition means (41) grants the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) by the game ball entering the special game ball. a wing accessory device (83) having a spherical portion (833);
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
Transitioning to the special gaming state triggered by the result of the first special determination or the second special determination being a transition to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot);
The fourth gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. to move to
Based on the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) that is granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry section (833), after the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed. Shift to the special gaming state,
The fifth gaming state (mode E) is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E) after the special game in the special gaming state, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special ball entering section (833), ends. The gaming machine described in appendix B28.

[Appendix B40]
The game state transition means (41), when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth game state or the fifth game state, The gaming machine according to appendix B39, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B39 and Appendix B40, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is one that causes the transition to a special gaming state (Type 1 jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entry section. By doing so, the right to move to the special gaming state is granted (type 2 jackpot), and the player moves to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can also be applied to a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine.

[Appendix B41]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. normal determination means (41) for normally determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position). ),
Compared to the third gaming state (mode A), the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are determined by the normal determining means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B26 to B40, characterized in that in the normal determination, there is a high probability that it will be determined that the movable accessory member (36) is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B41, the probability that the movable accessory member is determined to be activated in the normal determination by the normal determination means is different between the fourth gaming state, the fifth gaming state, and the third gaming state. Thereby, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B42]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') is different from the third gaming state (mode A) in that the detecting means (318) detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendices B24 to B41, characterized in that the time from detection to the start of the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B42, in the fourth gaming state, compared to the third gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage. It takes a short time to complete the process. Thereby, three game states from the third to the fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B43]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is different from the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') in that the movable accessory member (36) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B42, characterized in that the operating time is long.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B43, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth gaming state than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Thereby, three game states from the third to the fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the third winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B44]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B43, wherein the distribution section (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B44, the sorting section of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency (individual differences between gaming machines) of the distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and through trial and error, find out the launch position of the game ball that makes it easier for the game ball to be distributed to the second aisle. It is fun to find the launching position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball is distributed from those game machines to the second passage. It becomes possible to enjoy searching for easy-to-understand gaming machines.

[Appendix B45]
The gaming machine according to appendix B44, wherein the distribution section (38D, 38F) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed section (381D, 389F).

In the game machine according to appendix B45, the determination is made by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed part. Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix B46]
The gaming machine according to appendix B45, wherein the fixed part (381D, 389F) has one end fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix B47]
The gaming machine according to appendix B46, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix B48]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B45 to B47, wherein the fixing portions (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the gaming machines according to appendices B46 to B48, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part can be plastically changed, so if the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial setting value, the fixed part can be returned to the initial position. It will be possible to return it. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix B49]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
Supplementary Notes B45 to B48, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail at the top and a vertical line passing through this one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B49, by adjusting the nail at the top, it is possible to improve the deviation in the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix B50]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first path (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second path (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B45 to B49, which is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B50, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns, and It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix B51]
The gaming machine according to appendix B50, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix B52]
The sorting section (38C) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first passageway (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, toward the second passageway (352). The game machine according to appendix B51, characterized in that the game machine is a roller fixed to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B51 and Appendix B52, a rotating body such as a freely rotatable roller is used as the distribution part, and this rotating body also prevents accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with the rotating body. determined by Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix C1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
a first prize opening (314) into which game balls sorted into the first passageway (351) can enter;
a second winning hole (315) into which game balls sorted into the second passageway (352) can enter, and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314);
a detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is opened in the second prize opening (315). ) is movable to move from a first position where entry of the ball into the second passageway (352) is restricted to a second position where entry of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) into the second prize opening (315) is permitted. Accessory parts (36T to 36X) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix C1, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of the operation, entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls sorted into the second passage are restricted from entering the second prize opening when the movable accessory member is in the standby position where it is not in operation; When the accessory member is in the operating position, the game ball is allowed to enter the second prize opening. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole can be changed. This reduces the monotony of the game and reduces the monotony of the game in a game machine where game balls distributed to the first passage and game balls distributed to the second passage can enter the winning holes with different functions. It is possible to realize new gameplay according to the control mode of the operation, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix C2]
The movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are characterized in that the operating time is longer when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied than when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in appendix C1.

[Appendix C3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
It is better to launch a game ball into the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and it is better to launch the game ball into the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball. a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than when hitting a ball; and a first game state in which it is better to hit a game ball into the right side area so that passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319); 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41),
The first condition is that the game is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C2 and Appendix C3, the ease with which a game ball enters the second prize opening by the movable accessory member is determined depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. are considered to be different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is met, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and the game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the second winning hole, etc., depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease with which the game ball enters the second winning hole. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batted in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix C4]
The second winning a prize opening (315) is configured such that the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning a prize opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The game machine according to appendix C3, characterized in that the game ball to be detected is placed at a position that is longer than the time required for the ball to enter the second prize opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the other detection means to enter the second winning hole. The time required to hit the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched to the left side of the game board can enter the second winning slot, while a game ball launched to the right side is difficult to enter the second winning slot. becomes possible. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batted in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix C5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second prize opening (315). ) is allowed to enter the second prize opening (315), and the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) is restricted from entering the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine described in Appendix C3 or C4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second winning hole when the player hits right-handed in the first game state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed batting is encouraged in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. becomes possible.

[Appendix C6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is in the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C3 to C5, characterized in that the time is for allowing a ball to be entered.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C6, by hitting right in the second gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the second winning hole. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix C7]
A gap is formed between the second winning hole (315) and the game ball through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is directed toward the second winning hole (315). A guiding part (31M') to be moved;
Furthermore,
The movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are
At the first position (standby position), the second prize opening (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) and is launched to the right area of the game board (31). Restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize opening (315),
In the second position (operating position), the second winning hole (315) is opened, and a passage for the game ball is formed between the guiding part (31M') and the second winning hole (315). Supplementary notes C1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) and game balls that have been launched into the right side area are allowed to enter the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in C6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, a passage for the game ball is formed between the guiding part and the second winning opening, so that the second passage of the sorting device is controlled. Not only the passing game ball, but also the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board can be caused to enter the second prize opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix C8]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position),
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second prize opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened,
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second prize opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

The gaming machine according to appendix C8 has a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is slid between the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guiding part and the second winning opening is closed. , it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix C9]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36V) is movable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second prize opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened,
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second prize opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix C10]
The gaming machine according to appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the gaming board (31).

[Appendix C11]
The game machine according to appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

In the gaming machines according to appendices C9 to C11, the movable accessory member is moved along the vertical direction in the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guiding part and the second winning opening is closed. With the simple configuration of rotating around a rotating shaft, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix C12]
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright position at the second starting port (315) and at a third position (standby position) where the gap is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C12, there is no need to provide an evacuation guidance part, and in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is released for a short time, the game ball in the right area of the distribution device is movable. It can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port by the accessory member.

[Appendix C13]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable and includes a closing part (364W) that can close the second starting port (315) and the gap, and opens the second starting port (315) and the gap. It has a possible penetration part (363W),
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second prize opening (315) is closed by the closing part (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W),
The second position (operating position) is characterized in that the second prize opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing part (364W). The gaming machine described in Appendix C7.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C13 has a simple configuration in which a movable accessory member having a closing part and a penetrating part is rotated, and a game ball is caused to enter the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. becomes possible.

[Appendix C14]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position) in the gap. It is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A first penetrating portion (361X) that penetrates along a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis (36X) and through which a game ball can pass, and a first penetrating portion (361X) that penetrates in a direction that intersects the first penetrating portion (361X) when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. and has a second penetration part (362X) through which the game ball can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetration part (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetration part (361X) communicates with the second winning opening (315).

The gaming machine according to appendix C14 has a simple configuration in which a rotating body is rotated between the third winning hole and the guiding part, and the game ball can be entered from a plurality of routes into the third winning hole using one movable accessory member. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix C15]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) toward the third prize opening (315) when the movable accessory members (36T to 36X) are in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C7 to C14, further comprising a guard portion (31B) that prevents the player from exceeding the third winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, by providing the guard part, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward the second prize opening is ensured to win the second prize. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix C16]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) in response to the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passageway (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C15.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C16, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board are sent into the second prize opening by the movable accessory member. can be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix C17]
Supplementary note characterized in that it further includes a retreat guide part (393, 394) that is provided above the movable accessory member (36) and guides the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C16.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C17, a retraction guide portion is provided above the movable accessory member to guide the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix C17, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and it is encouraged to launch the game machine to the left side area of the game board, the second winning hole in the movable accessory member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the standby position, which is not recommended. When this is done, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix C18]
The retreat guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails on the side far from the second winning opening (315) are located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in appendix C17.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C18, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Furthermore, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guiding section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retreat guiding part, and to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix C19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball with the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C18, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying the time.

In the game machine according to appendix C19, a delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning hole. Therefore, even if a game ball is received by the movable accessory member due to a player hitting right in a game state where the movable accessory member has a short operating time and left-handed hitting is encouraged, for example, the delay section will prevent the game ball from being received by the movable accessory member. It is possible to secure a long time until the money reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the first position, which is not encouraged. In the case of moving in the opposite direction, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix C20]
The gaming machine according to appendix C19, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves the game ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix C21]
The delay portions (364D to 364H) include one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix C19 or C20.

[Appendix C22]
According to any of appendices C19 to C21, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix C23]
The gaming machine according to appendix C22, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix C20 to Appendix C23, the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix C24]
From appendix C19, the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C23.

[Appendix C25]
The gaming machine according to appendix C24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix C26]
The gaming machine according to appendix C24 or C25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices C24 to C26, the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, which not only improves the design of the gaming machine, but also improves the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory member. Since it becomes easier to draw attention to the game, the interest in the game increases.

[Appendix C27]
Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state when a predetermined state is established among the plurality of gaming states,
The gaming state transition means (41) operates in a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized in that it includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix C27 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix C27, it is possible to create a new gaming experience with improved gaming experience based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the ball entering the second prize opening is different. become.

[Appendix C28]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side area is likely to enter the first winning hole (314), but it is difficult to enter the second winning hole (315),
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is more likely to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315) compared to the gaming ball launched into the right area,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right side area is less likely to enter the first prize opening (314), and is more likely to enter the second winning opening (315) than the game ball launched into the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix C27, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C28, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. Thereby, three game states from the third to the fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C29]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left area so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and the other detection means (319) detects the game ball. This is advantageous for the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the right side area so that the passage of the ball is detected,
In the fifth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the right side area so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, and the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine according to appendix C28, wherein the gaming machine is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C29, the movable accessory member is activated when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, thereby allowing the gaming ball to enter the second prize opening. Make it. By utilizing whether or not the movable accessory member is activated, each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole are different.

[Appendix C30]
The first winning hole (314R) makes a first special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The second winning hole (315) makes a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C29, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation that a determination result that will cause the transition to the second special game will be obtained than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C30, the degree of expectation (function) that the player will be transferred to the second special game that is advantageous when the game ball enters the first starting port and the game ball enters the second starting port. are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratios between the first winning hole and the second starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different expectations for transition to the second special game. Thereby, the gameplay is enhanced and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix C31]
The third gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first prize opening (314L), and the second starting opening (3145). ) is difficult to hit,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), 315) is difficult to hit,
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left side area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), and are likely to enter the second winning hole (314). 315) is difficult to hit,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first prize opening (314), and the detection means (318) When it is detected that the game ball passes through the second passageway (352), the ball is likely to enter the third prize opening (315),
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first prize opening (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix C30, characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second winning hole (315).

[Appendix C32]
The third gaming state and the fourth gaming state are characterized in that the game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix C31.

[Appendix C33]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (315). It is difficult to be
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first prize opening (314) and are detected by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix C31 or C32, characterized in that a ball is likely to enter the second prize opening (315) when a game ball is detected to pass through the second passageway (352). .

In the gaming machines according to Appendix C31 to Appendix C33, three gaming states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different are realized by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. Ru. Therefore, there are a third and fourth game state in which the game ball is launched into the left area and the game is played using the sorting device, and a game state where the game ball is launched into the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A fifth game state that progresses can be realized. As a result, the game can be varied, and at the same time, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix C34]
The fourth gaming state (Mode C, Mode C') and the fifth gaming state (Mode E, Mode E') are different from the third gaming state (Mode A) in the first special judgment and the fifth gaming state (Mode E, Mode E'). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C30 to C33, characterized in that in the special determination, there is a high probability that it will be determined that the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) will be entered.

[Appendix C35]
A first special symbol display unit (1) that executes a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) using a first special symbol; 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the Shift to special gaming state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special After the end of the game, transition to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'),
Provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special The gaming machine according to appendix C34, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game ends.

According to the gaming machines according to appendix C34 and appendix C35, for example, there is a gaming feature that has a barrier before transitioning to a special gaming state where a large amount of gaming value is given, a gaming feature that has a plurality of substantially variable continuation rates, etc. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of gaming features.

[Appendix C36]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
a first determination result (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
a second determination result (normal jackpot) that is transferred to a gaming state other than the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
The gaming machine according to appendix C35, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

[Appendix C37]
The gaming state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the fourth game state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination that the transition to the special gaming state is to be made. Shift to the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches an upper limit number in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to appendix C36, characterized by:

In the gaming machines according to appendices C36 and C37, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result shifts to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the fifth determination result after the end of the special game. and a second determination result for transitioning to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Furthermore, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to be shifted to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. It has three gaming states, 3rd to 5th gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole. Provided that the result of the first special judgment is to move to the special gaming state, after the special game ends, the fourth gaming state will be entered, and the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening will be the trigger. The fifth gaming state is entered after the special game ends, provided that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the first to the third gaming state can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. According to the gaming machine according to appendix C36 and appendix C37, the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is entered in stages through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, enter the game ball into the second prize opening in the special game determination, and 2. The result of the special determination must be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in stages.

[Appendix C38]
When the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, the gaming state transition means (41) is configured to change the gaming state to the first special judgment or the second special judgment triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment. The gaming machine according to appendix C37, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the first gaming state (mode A) after the special game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C38, if the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state shift to the third gaming state after the special game ends. The percentage of stay in the state is lower. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, not only can you expect the game ball to enter the second prize opening with the support of the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This mode has a high probability of being determined to be shifted to. Therefore, since the percentage of stays in the fourth and fifth gaming states is low, the gameplay tends to fall into the third gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharp transition between gaming states, and the gaming value that the player can obtain. It is also possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of features.

[Appendix C39]
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment in the third gaming state (mode A) is to move to the special gaming state, the first special judgment or the second special judgment a transition number setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state with the transition to the special gaming state based on the first time;
The game state transition means (41) is characterized in that the game state is transitioned to the third game state (mode A) after the special game state ends for the upper limit number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine described in appendix C35.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C39 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and also has the first winning state up to the upper limit number of transitions. The transition to the special gaming state continues. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole causes the transition to the special gaming state, the transition to the fourth gaming state is made after the end of the special game. , on the condition that the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, after the end of the special game, the game state is shifted to the fifth gaming state. . That is, the transition destination of the game state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball entering the first winning hole or the second winning hole is triggered. Therefore, in terms of opportunities to transition to the remaining special gaming states after the first win, the gameplay is determined by how to transition to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, while leaving as many opportunities to transition to the special gaming state. We can provide gaming machines with

[Appendix C40]
The gaming state transition means (41) determines that the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is an upper limit number in the fourth gaming state (mode C') or the fifth gaming state (mode E'). The gaming machine according to appendix C35, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) when the game mode reaches .

[Appendix C41]
further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special Shifting to the fourth gaming state (mode C') after the end of the special game on the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering part,
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C') is to cause a transition to the special gaming state, in the special game in the special gaming state, the The gaming machine according to appendix C40, characterized in that, on the condition that a game ball enters the special ball entry section (824), the game enters the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the end of the special game. .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C40 and Appendix C41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. Ru. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can be applied to an ST machine including a so-called V-ST machine. Furthermore, in the gaming machines according to appendices C40 and C41, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, first, after shifting to the fourth gaming state, play the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number. It is necessary that the result of the special determination will cause the player to move to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, how quickly can the second special symbol game obtain a determination result for shifting to the special gaming state, and shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player? It has a game property of whether to let the player play or not, and further determines how many special game states can be transitioned to before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after transitioning to the fifth game state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game feature where you decide whether to win the result or not.

[Appendix C42]
A first special symbol display unit (1) that executes a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) using a first special symbol; 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
When the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small win) different from the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state. When activated, a game ball can enter the game ball, and the game state transition means (41) grants the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) by the game ball entering the special game ball. a wing accessory device (83) having a spherical portion (833);
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
Transitioning to the special gaming state triggered by the result of the first special determination or the second special determination being a transition to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot);
The fourth gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. to move to
Based on the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) that is granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry section (833), after the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed. Shifting to the special gaming state,
The fifth gaming state (mode E) is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E) after the special game in the special gaming state, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special ball entering section (833), ends. The gaming machine according to appendix C31.

[Appendix C43]
The game state transition means (41), when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the fourth game state or the fifth game state, The gaming machine according to appendix C42, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix C42 and Appendix C43, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is one that causes the transition to a special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entry section. By doing so, the right to move to the special gaming state is granted (type 2 jackpot), and the player moves to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the third to the fifth gaming state can also be applied to a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine.

[Appendix C44]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. normal determination means (41) for normally determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position). ),
Compared to the third gaming state (mode A), the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are determined by the normal determining means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C27 to C43, characterized in that in the normal determination, there is a high probability that it will be determined that the movable accessory member (36) is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C44, the probability that the movable accessory member is determined to be activated in the normal judgment by the normal judgment means is different between the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state. Thereby, three game states from the third to the fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C45]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') is different from the third gaming state (mode A) in that the detecting means (318) detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendices C27 to C44, wherein the time from when the movable accessory member (36) is detected to when the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is started is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C45, in the fourth gaming state, compared to the third gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage. It takes a short time to complete the process. As a result, three game states, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C46]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is different from the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') in that the movable accessory member (36) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C27 to C45, characterized in that the operating time is long.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C46, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth gaming state than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Thereby, three game states, ie, the third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the third winning hole are different, can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C47]
The game machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C46, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C47, the sorting section of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency (individual differences between gaming machines) of the distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and through trial and error, find out the launch position of the game ball that makes it easier for the game ball to be distributed to the second aisle. It is fun to find the launching position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball is distributed from those game machines to the second passage. It becomes possible to enjoy searching for easy-to-understand game machines.

[Appendix C48]
The gaming machine according to appendix C47, wherein the distribution section (38D, 38F) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed section (381D, 389F).

In the game machine according to appendix C48, the determination is made based on accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed part. Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix C49]
The gaming machine according to appendix C48, wherein the fixed part (381D, 389F) has one end fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix C50]
The gaming machine according to appendix C49, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix C51]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C48 to C50, wherein the fixing portions (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the gaming machines according to appendices C49 to C51, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part is plastically changeable, so if the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial setting value, the fixed part can be returned to the initial position. It will be possible to return it. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix C52]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
Supplementary Notes C48 to C51, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail at the top and a vertical line passing through this one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C52, by adjusting the nail at the top, it is possible to improve the bias in the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix C53]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first path (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second path (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C48 to C52, characterized in that the game machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix C54]
The gaming machine according to appendix C53, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix C55]
The sorting section (38C) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first passageway (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, toward the second passageway (352). The game machine according to appendix C54, characterized in that the game machine is a roller fixed to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix C54 and Appendix C55, a rotating body such as a freely rotatable roller is used as the distribution part, and this rotating body also prevents accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with the rotating body. determined by Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix D1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
a first prize opening (314) into which game balls sorted into the first passageway (351) can enter;
a second winning hole (313') into which game balls sorted into the second passageway (352) can enter, and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314);
A third winning hole (315) into which game balls sorted into the second passageway (352) can enter, and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313'). and,
a detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is opened in the second prize opening (313). ') and the third winning opening (315), from the first position where the ball entering one winning opening is restricted and the ball entering the other winning opening is allowed, the second passage (352 ) A movable accessory that moves to a second position in which the game ball that has passed through the slot is allowed to enter the one winning opening (313') and is restricted from entering the other winning opening (315). A member (36);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of the operation, entry of the game ball into the third prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, when the game balls sorted to the second passage are in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operating, the game balls are restricted from entering the third prize opening, When the movable accessory member is in the second operating position, the game ball is allowed to enter the third winning hole. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the ratio of balls entering the third winning hole can be changed. This reduces the monotony of the game in a game machine where the game balls sorted by the sorting device can enter one of three winning holes with different functions, and the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member can be adjusted accordingly. It is possible to realize new gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix D2]
A supplementary note characterized in that the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is longer when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied than when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in D1.

[Appendix D3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
It is better to launch a game ball into the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and it is better to launch the game ball into the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball. a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than when hitting a ball; and a first game state in which it is better to hit a game ball into the right side area so that passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319); 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41),
The first condition is that the game is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D2 and Appendix D3, the ease with which the game ball enters the third prize opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied is determined. are considered to be different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is met, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and the game ball launched to the right side area is difficult to enter the third winning hole, etc., depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease with which the game ball enters the third prize opening. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix D4]
The third winning hole (315) is configured so that the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the third winning hole (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The game machine according to appendix D3, characterized in that the game ball to be detected is placed at a position longer than the time required for the ball to enter the third winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the third winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the other detection means to enter the third winning hole. The time required to hit the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched to the left side of the game board can enter the third prize opening, while a game ball launched to the right side area is made difficult to enter the third prize opening. becomes possible. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix D5]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the third prize opening (315). ) is allowed to enter the third prize opening (315), and the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is restricted from entering the third prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D3 or D4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the third winning hole when the player hits right-handed in the first game state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed batting is encouraged in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. becomes possible.

[Appendix D6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is in the third prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D3 to D5, characterized in that the time is for allowing a ball to be entered.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D6, by hitting right in the second gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the third winning hole. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix D8]
The movable accessory member (36) is
An opening/closing part that brings the second winning opening (313') into the open state in the first position (standby position) and brings the second winning opening (313') into the closed state in the second position (operating position). (362) and
Continuing with the opening/closing part (362), restricting the movement of the game ball to the right of the second winning opening (313') toward the opening/closing part (362) in the first position (standby position), a guide part (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the second winning opening (313') toward the opening/closing part (362) in a second position (operating position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D7, characterized by having the following.

[Appendix D9]
The opening/closing part (362) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning hole (313'), and the ball is allowed to enter the third winning hole (315). Restrict ball entry,
In the second position (operating position), the game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) are restricted from entering the second winning opening (313'), and the ball entering the third winning opening (315) is restricted. allow the ball to enter,
The guide part is
in the first position (standby position), restricting the movement of the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362);
The game machine according to appendix D8, characterized in that, in the second position (operating position), a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is allowed to move toward the opening/closing part (362). .

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D8 and Appendix D9, the movable accessory member has an opening/closing part that can open and close the second winning opening and a guide part that moves the game ball on the right side of the second winning opening toward the opening/closing part. With the simple configuration of providing a movable accessory member, game balls can be won into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D10]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) in response to the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passageway (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D9.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D10, not only the gaming balls passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming balls launched to the right side area of the gaming board are sent to the third prize opening by the movable accessory member. can be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the third winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix D11]
Supplementary note characterized in that it further includes a retreat guide part (393, 394) that is provided above the movable accessory member (36) and guides the game ball in a direction away from the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D10.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11, a retraction guide portion is provided above the movable accessory member to guide the game ball in a direction away from the third winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix D11, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and it is encouraged to launch the game machine to the left side area of the game board, the third winning hole in the movable accessory member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the third prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the third prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the standby position, so hitting methods that are not encouraged When this is done, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D12]
The retreat guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails on the side far from the third winning hole (315) are located lower than the nails on the side closer to the third winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D11.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D12, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Furthermore, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guiding section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retreat guiding part, and to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix D13]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the third prize opening (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball with the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D12, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying the time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D13, a delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the third winning hole. Therefore, even if a game ball is received by the movable accessory member due to a player hitting right in a game state where the movable accessory member has a short operating time and left-handed hitting is encouraged, for example, the delay section will prevent the game ball from being received by the movable accessory member. It is possible to secure a longer time for the player to reach the third prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the third prize opening in a short time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the first position, which is not encouraged. In the case of moving in the opposite direction, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D14]
The gaming machine according to appendix D13, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves the game ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix D15]
The delay portions (364D to 364H) include one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix D13 or D14.

[Appendix D16]
According to any of appendices D13 to D15, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix D17]
The gaming machine according to appendix D16, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix D14 to Appendix D17, the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix D18]
From appendix D13, wherein the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D17.

[Appendix D19]
The gaming machine according to appendix D18, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction that is opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix D20]
The gaming machine according to appendix D18 or D19, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices D18 to D20, the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, which not only improves the design of the gaming machine, but also improves the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory member. Since it becomes easier to draw attention to the game, the interest in the game increases.

[Appendix D21]
Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state when a predetermined state is established among the plurality of gaming states,
The gaming state transition means (41) operates in a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and The gaming machine according to appendix D1, which includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix D21 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the third winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix D21, it is possible to create a new gaming experience with improved gaming experience based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the ball entering the third prize opening is different. become.

[Appendix D22]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side area is likely to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313'), and is difficult to enter the third winning hole (315);
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter any of the first winning hole (314), the second winning hole (313'), and the third winning hole (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side area is larger than the game ball launched into the right area in the first winning hole (314), the second winning hole (313'), and the third winning hole (315). It is easy to get hit by either,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched to the right side area is less likely to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313'), and is less likely to enter the third winning hole than the game ball hit to the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix D21, characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D22, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole is determined by the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. different. Thereby, three game states from third to fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole, the second winning hole, and the third winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix D23]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to hit the game ball into the left side area so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and the other detection means (319) detects the game ball. is advantageous for the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the right side area so that the passage of the ball is detected;
In the fifth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the right side area so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine according to appendix D22 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player than when the game ball is launched into the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D23, the movable accessory member is activated when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, thereby allowing the gaming ball to enter the third prize opening. Make it. By utilizing whether or not the movable accessory member is activated, each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio to the third winning hole are different.

[Appendix D24]
The first winning hole (314L) and the second starting hole (314R) shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Providing an opportunity to make the first special judgment (jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to
The third winning hole (315) makes a second special determination as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed due to the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix D23, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation that a determination result that will cause the transition to the second special game will be obtained than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D24, the degree of expectation (function) that the second special game that is advantageous to the player will be transferred due to the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting port and the entry of the game ball into the third starting port. are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the third starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different expectations for transition to the second special game. Thereby, the gameplay is enhanced and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D25]
The gaming machine according to appendix D24, wherein the second starting opening (313') is a general winning opening.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D25, since the second starting opening is a general winning opening, the frequency at which special judgments (first special judgment and second special judgment) can be received is increased in the third to fifth gaming states. different. As a result, special judgments can be received at a frequency according to the gaming state, so that the games are diversified, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D26]
The third gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314) and enter the second starting hole (313). ') and the ball is difficult to enter the third prize opening (315),
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) enter the first winning hole (314) and the third winning hole (315). It is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening (313'),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left side area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), and are likely to enter the second winning hole (314). 313') and the third winning hole (315),
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313'). It is difficult for the game ball to enter the third prize opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passageway (352),
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313'), and the other detecting means (319) detects the game ball in the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix D25, characterized in that the ball is likely to be entered into the third winning hole (315) upon detection of passing the ball.

[Appendix D27]
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, the game ball launched into the right side area enters the first winning hole (314), the second winning hole (313'), and the third winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D26, characterized in that it is difficult for a ball to be hit in any of the above.

[Appendix D28]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left side area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), and are likely to enter the second winning hole (314). 313') and the third winning hole (315),
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) win prizes in the first prize opening (314) and the second prize opening (313'). The game ball is difficult to enter into the third prize opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passageway (352). The gaming machine described in Appendix D26 or D27.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix D26 to Appendix D28, by employing the sorting device together with the movable accessory member, three game states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio with respect to the third prize opening are different are realized. Therefore, there are a third and fourth game state in which the game ball is launched into the left area and the game is played using the sorting device, and a game state where the game ball is launched into the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A fifth game state that progresses can be realized. As a result, the game can be varied, and at the same time, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D29]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are different from the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special judgment and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D24 to D28, characterized in that in the special determination, there is a high probability that it will be determined that the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) will be entered.

[Appendix D30]
A first special symbol game in which the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) and the second starting opening (313') is displayed using a first special symbol. a first special symbol display section (371) that executes;
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the third winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the Shift to special gaming state,
The condition is that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of game balls into the first winning hole (314) and the second winning hole (313') causes the transition to the special gaming state. , after the special game in the special game state ends, the fourth game state (mode C, mode C') is entered;
Provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the third prize winning hole (315) is to cause the transition to the special gaming state, the special The gaming machine according to appendix D29, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game ends.

According to the gaming machines according to appendix D29 and appendix D30, for example, there is a gaming feature that has a barrier before moving to a special gaming state where a large amount of gaming value is given, a gaming feature that has a plurality of substantially variable continuation rates, etc. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of gaming features.

[Appendix D31]
The game machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D30, wherein the distribution section (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D31, the sorting section of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency (individual differences between gaming machines) of the distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and through trial and error, find out the launch position of the game ball that makes it easier for the game ball to be distributed to the second aisle. It is fun to find the launching position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball is distributed from those game machines to the second passage. It becomes possible to enjoy searching for easy-to-understand game machines.

[Appendix D32]
The gaming machine according to appendix D31, wherein the distribution section (38D, 38F) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed section (381D, 389F).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D32, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed part. Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix D33]
The gaming machine according to appendix D32, wherein the fixed part (381D, 389F) has one end fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix D34]
The gaming machine according to appendix D33, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix D35]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D32 to D34, wherein the fixing portions (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the gaming machines according to appendices D33 to D35, at least a part of the fixing part of the distribution part can be plastically changed, so if the position of the fixing part deviates from the initial setting value, the fixing part can be returned to the initial position. It will be possible to return it. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix D36]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
Supplementary Notes D32 to D35, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail at the top and a vertical line passing through this one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D36, by adjusting the nail at the top, it is possible to improve the bias in the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix D37]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first path (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second path (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D32 to D36, which is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D37, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns, and It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix D38]
The gaming machine according to appendix D37, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix D39]
The sorting section (38C) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first passageway (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, toward the second passageway (352). The game machine according to appendix D38, characterized in that the game machine is a roller fixed to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix D38 and Appendix D39, a rotating body such as a freely rotatable roller is used as the distribution part, and this rotating body also prevents accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with the rotating body. determined by Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix E1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
A plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole (314) and a second winning hole (315) having a different function from the first winning hole (314);
a discharge port (317) for discharging game balls that did not enter the plurality of winning holes;
a detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening (315) is restricted. a movable accessory member (36) that is movable from a first position (standby position) to a second position (operating position) where a game ball is allowed to enter the second prize opening (314);
Equipped with
The first prize opening (314) allows the game balls sorted to the first passageway (351) to enter,
The game ball that passed through the second passage (352) is
When the movable accessory member (36) is in the first position (standby position), entry of the ball into the second prize opening (315) is restricted, and the ball is discharged from the discharge opening (317),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the movable accessory member (36) is in the second position (operating position), a ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of the operation, entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, when the game balls sorted to the second passage are in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operating, the game balls are restricted from entering the second prize opening, When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the ratio of balls entering the second winning hole can be changed. This reduces the monotony of the game in a game machine where the game balls sorted into the second passage can be discharged through the discharge port, and realizes new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix E2]
A supplementary note characterized in that the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is longer when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied than when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in E1.

[Appendix E3]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
It is better to launch a game ball into the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and it is better to launch the game ball into the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball. a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than when hitting a ball; and a first game state in which it is better to hit a game ball into the right side area so that passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319); 318), the game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected. Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41),
The first condition is that the game is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix E2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E2 and Appendix E3, the ease with which the game ball enters the third prize opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied is determined. are considered to be different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is met, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and the game ball launched to the right side area is difficult to enter the third winning hole, etc., depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease with which the game ball enters the third prize opening. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix E4]
The second winning a prize opening (315) is configured such that the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning a prize opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The game machine according to appendix E3, characterized in that the game ball to be detected is placed at a position that is longer than the time required for the ball to enter the second prize opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the other detection means to enter the second winning hole. The time required to hit the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched to the left side of the game board can enter the second winning slot, while a game ball launched to the right side is difficult to enter the second winning slot. becomes possible. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix E5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the detection means (318) is in the second prize opening (315). ) is allowed to enter the second prize opening (315), and the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is restricted from entering the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine described in Appendix E3 or E4.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second prize opening when the player hits right-handed in the first game state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed batting is encouraged in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. becomes possible.

[Appendix E6]
The operation time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is in the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E3 to E5, characterized in that the time is for allowing a ball to be entered.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E6, by hitting right in the second gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the second winning hole. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix E7]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) is
Operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) in response to the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319),
When in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passageway (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E7, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board are also thrown into the third prize opening by the movable accessory member. can be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the third winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix E8]
Supplementary note characterized in that it further includes a retreat guide part (393, 394) that is provided above the movable accessory member (36) and guides the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E7.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, a retreat guiding part is provided above the movable accessory member to guide the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix E8, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and it is encouraged to launch the game machine to the left side area of the game board, the second prize opening in the movable accessory member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the standby position, which is not recommended. When this is done, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix E9]
The retreat guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails on the side far from the second winning opening (315) are located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in appendix E8.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E9, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Furthermore, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guiding section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retreat guiding part, and to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix E10]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position, and moves the game ball with the movable accessory member (36). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E9, characterized by having a delay unit (364) for delaying the time.

In the game machine according to appendix E10, a delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning hole. Therefore, even if a game ball is received by the movable accessory member due to a player hitting right in a game state where the movable accessory member has a short operating time and left-handed hitting is encouraged, for example, the delay section will prevent the game ball from being received by the movable accessory member. It is possible to secure a long time until the money reaches the second prize opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the first position, which is not encouraged. In the case of moving in the opposite direction, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix E11]
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves the game ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix E12]
The delay portions (364D to 364H) include one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix E10 or E11.

[Appendix E13]
According to any of appendices E10 to E12, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to appendix E13, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix E11 to Appendix E14, the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix E15]
From appendix E10, wherein the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E14.

[Appendix E16]
The gaming machine according to appendix E15, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction that is opposite to the moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix E17]
The gaming machine according to appendix E15 or E16, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices E15 to E17, the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, which not only improves the design of the gaming machine, but also improves the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory member. Since it becomes easier to draw attention to the game, the interest in the game increases.

[Appendix E18]
Further comprising a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state when a predetermined state is established among the plurality of gaming states,
The gaming state transition means (41) operates in a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and The gaming machine according to appendix E1, characterized in that it includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to appendix E18 has three gaming states, third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix E18, it is possible to create new gameplay with improved gameplay based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the ball entering the second prize opening is different. become.

[Appendix E19]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side area is likely to enter the first winning hole (314) and difficult to enter the second winning hole (315),
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter either the first winning hole (314) or the second winning hole (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is more likely to enter both the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315) than the gaming ball launched into the right area,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right side area is less likely to enter the first prize opening (314), and is more likely to enter the second winning opening (315) than the game ball launched into the left side area. The gaming machine according to appendix E18, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. Thereby, three game states from the third to the fifth game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix E20]
Further comprising another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left area so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and the other detection means (319) detects the game ball. This is advantageous for the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the right side area so that the passage of the ball is detected,
In the fifth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the right side area so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, and the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine according to appendix E19, characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player than when the game ball is launched into the left side area.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E20, the movable accessory member is activated when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means, thereby allowing the gaming ball to enter the second prize opening. Make it. By utilizing whether or not the movable accessory member is activated, each of the third to fifth game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states, ie, third to fifth game states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio to the second winning hole are different.

[Appendix E21]
The first winning hole (314) makes a first special determination as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed due to the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The second winning hole (315) makes a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix E20, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation that a determination result that will cause the transition to the second special game will be obtained than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21, the degree of expectation (function) that the player will be transferred to the second special game that is advantageous due to the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting port and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting port. are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratios between the first winning hole and the second starting hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different expectations for transition to the second special game. Thereby, the gameplay is enhanced and the interest of playing the game ball is improved. In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E21, since game balls that have not won a prize in any of the plurality of winning holes are discharged from the discharge opening, in the third to fifth gaming states, the special judgment (first special judgment and The frequency with which you can receive the second special judgment differs. As a result, special judgments can be received at a frequency according to the gaming state, so that the games are diversified, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix E22]
The third gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left side area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), and are likely to enter the second winning hole (314). 315) is difficult to hit,
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the second passage (352) by the sorting device (35) are difficult to enter the first winning hole (314), and are difficult to enter into the second winning hole (314). 315) is likely to be thrown into the ball,
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left side area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), and are likely to enter the second winning hole (314). 315) is difficult to hit,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first prize opening (314), and the detection means (318) When it is detected that a game ball passes through the second passageway (352), the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening (315),
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter the first prize opening (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix E21, characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second winning hole (315).

[Appendix E23]
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball launched into the right side area to enter either the first winning hole (314) or the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E22, characterized in that:

[Appendix E24]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left side area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), and are likely to enter the second winning hole (314). 315) is difficult to hit,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first prize opening (314) and are detected by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix E22 or E23, characterized in that a ball is likely to enter the second prize opening (315) when a game ball is detected to pass through the second passageway (352). .

In the gaming machines according to Appendix E22 to Appendix E24, three gaming states in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different are realized by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. Ru. Therefore, there are a third and fourth game state in which the game ball is launched into the left area and the game is played using the sorting device, and a game state where the game ball is launched into the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A fifth game state that progresses can be realized. As a result, the game can be varied, and at the same time, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix E25]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are different from the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special judgment and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E20 to E24, characterized in that, in the special determination, there is a high probability that the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) will be determined.

[Appendix E26]
A first special symbol display unit (1) that executes a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) using a first special symbol; 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the third winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the Shift to special gaming state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special After the end of the game, transition to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C'),
Provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special The gaming machine according to appendix E25, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game ends.

According to the gaming machines according to appendix E25 and appendix E26, for example, there is a gaming feature that has a barrier before transitioning to a special gaming state where a large amount of gaming value is given, a gaming feature that has a plurality of substantially variable continuation rates, etc. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of gaming features.

[Appendix E27]
The game machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E26, wherein the distribution section (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E27, the sorting section of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency (individual differences between gaming machines) of the distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and through trial and error, find out the launch position of the game ball that makes it easier for the game ball to be distributed to the second aisle. It is fun to find the launching position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball is distributed from those game machines to the second passage. It becomes possible to enjoy searching for easy-to-understand game machines.

[Appendix E28]
The gaming machine according to appendix E27, wherein the distribution section (38D, 38F) has a fixed section (381D, 389F) that is immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E28, the determination is made by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed part. Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix E29]
The gaming machine according to appendix E28, wherein the fixed part (381D, 389F) has one end fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix E30]
The gaming machine according to appendix E29, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix E31]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E28 to E30, wherein the fixing portions (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix E29 to Appendix E31, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part can be plastically changed, so if the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial setting value, the fixed part can be returned to the initial position. It will be possible to return it. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix E32]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
Supplementary Notes E29 to E31, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail at the top and a vertical line passing through this one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E32, by adjusting the nail at the top, it is possible to improve the deviation in the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix E33]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first path (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second path (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E28 to E32, characterized in that the gaming machine is rotatable in a second direction that moves the game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E33, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix E34]
The gaming machine according to appendix E33, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix E35]
The sorting section (38C) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first passageway (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, toward the second passageway (352). The game machine according to appendix E34, characterized in that the game machine is a roller fixed to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the game machines according to Appendix E34 and Appendix E35, a rotating body such as a freely rotatable roller is used as the distribution part, and this rotating body also prevents accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with the rotating body. determined by Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix F1]
A first prize opening (314) into which game balls can enter;
a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can be inserted and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314);
a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state when a predetermined state is established among a plurality of gaming states;
Equipped with
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a first gaming state (mode A), a second gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and a third gaming state (mode E, mode E'),
The first gaming state (mode A), the second gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') are mutually related to the first winning opening (314) and the A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the ball entry ratio is different from that of the second winning hole (315).

The gaming machine according to appendix F1 has three gaming states, first to third gaming states, in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix F1, a new gaming experience with improved gameplay is created based on three gaming states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different. It becomes possible to create.

[Appendix F2]
The first gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side area is likely to enter the first winning hole (314), but it is difficult to enter the second winning hole (315),
The game ball launched into the right side area is difficult to enter either the first winning hole (314) or the second winning hole (315),
The second gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is more likely to enter the first winning opening (351) and the second winning opening (315) compared to the gaming ball launched into the right area,
The third gaming state is
While the game ball launched to the right side area is less likely to enter the first winning hole (314), it is more likely to enter the second winning hole (315) than the game ball launched to the left side area. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, characterized in that the gaming machine is easily played.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2, in each of the first to third gaming states, the ease with which the ball enters the first winning hole and the second winning hole differs depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. Thereby, three game states from the first to the third game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix F3]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution part (38), and is launched into the left side area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). a sorting device (35) for distributing the game balls into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the sorting section (38);
a first detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
a second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31);
The first detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second path (352), or the second detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Taking the detection as a trigger, the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) from the first position (standby position) where the entering of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) is restricted. a movable accessory member (36) movable to a second position (actuation position) where the ball is allowed;
Furthermore,
In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, it is better for the second detecting means (319) to launch the game ball into the left side area so that the first detecting means (318) detects the passing of the game ball. It is advantageous for the player compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the right side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected,
In the third gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the right area so that the second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball, and the first detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine according to appendix F2, characterized in that it is advantageous for the player compared to a case where the game ball is launched into the left side area as shown in FIG.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, the movable accessory member is activated when the passing of the gaming ball is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, so that the gaming ball enters the second prize opening. enable. Each of the first to third game states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by utilizing whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three game states from the first to the third game state in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different.

[Appendix F4]
The first winning hole (314) makes a first special determination as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed due to the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The second winning hole (315) makes a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. (Lottery for jackpots)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix F3, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation that a determination result that will cause the transition to the second special game will be obtained than the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, the degree of expectation (function) that the player will be transferred to the second special game advantageous by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port. are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole different, it is possible to realize three game states with different expectations for transition to the second special game. Thereby, the gameplay is enhanced and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix F5]
The first gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), while the balls are likely to enter the first winning hole (314). (315) It is difficult to get the ball in,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the sorting device (35) are placed in either the first winning hole (314) or the second winning hole (315). It is also difficult to get a ball in,
The second gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) tend to enter the first winning hole (351), while the balls are easily entered into the first winning hole (351). (352) It is difficult to get a ball in,
The game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first prize opening (351), while the first detection When the means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passageway (352), the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening (315);
The third gaming state is
While it is difficult for the game ball launched into the right side area to enter the first prize opening (314), it is detected by the second detection means (319) that the game ball passes through the right side specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix F4, characterized in that the ball is likely to be entered into the second prize opening (315) by taking this as an opportunity.

[Appendix F6]
In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the game ball launched into the right side area is unlikely to enter either the first winning opening (314) or the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix F5, characterized by:

[Appendix F7]
The third gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area and sorted into the first path (351) by the sorting device (35) are likely to enter the first winning hole (314), while the balls are likely to enter the first winning hole (314). (315) It is difficult to get the ball in,
While the game balls launched into the left area and distributed to the second path (352) by the distribution device (35) are unlikely to enter the first prize opening (314), the first detection means Supplementary note F5 or F6 is characterized in that the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole (352) when the game ball is detected to pass through the second passageway (352) by (318). The game machine described.

In the gaming machines according to appendices F5 to F7, by employing a sorting device together with the movable accessory member, three game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different are realized. Ru. Therefore, there are two game states: a first game state and a second game state in which the game ball is launched into the left area and the game is played using the sorting device, and a second game state in which the game ball is launched into the right area and the game is played without using the sorting device. A third game state that progresses can be realized. As a result, the game can be varied, and at the same time, the gameplay is enhanced, and the interest of playing the game ball is improved.

[Appendix F8]
The second gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') are different from the first gaming state (mode A) in the first special judgment and the third gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F4 to F7, characterized in that in the special determination, there is a high probability that it will be determined that the game will be shifted to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state).

[Appendix F9]
A first special symbol display unit (1) that executes a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314) using a first special symbol; 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state, after the end of the first special symbol game based on the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the Shift to special gaming state,
On the condition that the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314L, 314R) is to move to the special gaming state, in the special gaming state. After the end of the special game, transition to the second game state (mode C, mode C'),
Provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the special The gaming machine according to appendix F8, characterized in that the game enters the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the game ends.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix F8 and Appendix F9, for example, there is a gaming feature that has a barrier before transitioning to a special gaming state where a large amount of gaming value is given, a gaming feature that has a plurality of substantially variable continuation rates, etc. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of gaming features.

[Appendix F10]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
a first determination result (probability variable jackpot) that is transferred to the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
a second determination result (normal jackpot) that causes a transition to a gaming state other than the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
The gaming machine according to appendix F9, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

[Appendix F11]
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, after the special game triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment ends, the second game is played. state (mode C, mode C') and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination that the transition to the special gaming state is to be made. Shift to a fourth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches an upper limit number in the fourth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to appendix F10, characterized by:

In the gaming machines according to appendices F10 and F11, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result shifts to the third gaming state after the end of the special game, and the third determination result changes after the end of the special game. and a second determination result for transitioning to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Furthermore, the second gaming state and the third gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to be shifted to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the first gaming state. It has three gaming states, first to third gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entering ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole. Provided that the result of the first special judgment is to move to the special gaming state, the second gaming state will be entered after the end of the special game, and the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening will be the trigger. A transition to a third gaming state is made after the end of the special game on the condition that the result of the second special determination is a transition to a special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the first to the third gaming state can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. According to the gaming machine according to appendices F10 and F11, the third gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is transitioned in stages through the second gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the second gaming state, and in the second gaming state, enter the game ball into the second prize opening in the special game judgment, and 2. The result of the special determination must be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to shift to a gaming state advantageous in stages.

[Appendix F12]
When the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is the second judgment result, the gaming state transition means (41) is configured to change the gaming state to the first special judgment or the second special judgment triggered by the first special judgment or the second special judgment. The gaming machine according to appendix F9, characterized in that the game machine shifts to the first gaming state (mode A) after the special game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12, if the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the second gaming state and the third gaming state shift to the first gaming state after the special game ends. The percentage of stay in the state is lower. On the other hand, in the second game state and the third game state, not only can you expect the game ball to enter the second prize opening with the support of the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special judgment or the second special judgment. This mode has a high probability of being determined to be shifted to. Therefore, because the percentage of stays in the second and third gaming states is low, the gameplay tends to fall into the first gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharp transition between gaming states, and the gaming value that the player can obtain. It is also possible to provide gaming machines with a variety of features.

[Appendix F13]
If the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment in the first gaming state (mode A) is to move to the special gaming state, the first special judgment or the second special judgment a transition number setting means for setting an upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state with the transition to the special gaming state based on the first time;
The gaming state transition means (41) is characterized in that the gaming state transition means (41) transitions to the first gaming state (mode A) after the special gaming state ends for the upper limit number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine described in appendix F9.

The gaming machine according to Appendix F13 has three gaming states, first to third gaming states, in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first winning hole and the second winning hole is different, and also has the first winning state up to the upper limit number of transitions. The transition to the special gaming state continues. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the first to the third gaming state can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state is made after the end of the special game. , on the condition that the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state, the transition to the third gaming state is made after the end of the special game. . That is, the destination of the game state after the special game changes depending on whether the ball enters the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in the remaining opportunities to transition to the special gaming state after the first win, the gameplay is determined by how to transition to the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player while leaving as many opportunities to transition to the special gaming state. We can provide gaming machines with

[Appendix F14]
The gaming state transition means (41) determines that the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is an upper limit number in the second gaming state (mode C') or the third gaming state (mode E'). The gaming machine according to appendix F9, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the first gaming state (mode A) when the gaming machine reaches the mode A.

[Appendix F15]
further comprising a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry section (824) that is opened in the special game,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the first gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special Shifting to the second gaming state (mode C') after the end of the special game on the condition that the game ball enters the ball entering part,
If the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the second gaming state (mode C') is to cause a transition to the special gaming state, in the special game in the special gaming state, the The gaming machine according to appendix F14, characterized in that, on the condition that a game ball enters the special ball entry section (824), the game enters the third gaming state (mode E') after the end of the special game. .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F14 and Appendix F15, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the second gaming state or the third gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. Ru. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states, first to third gaming states, can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Furthermore, in the gaming machines according to appendices F14 and F15, in order to shift to the third gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through the second gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the third gaming state, first, after shifting to the second gaming state, play the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reach the upper limit number. It is necessary that the result of the special determination will cause the player to move to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, how quickly can the player obtain a determination result for shifting to the special gaming state with the second special symbol game, and shift to the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player? It has a game property of whether to make the game move to the third game state, and further determines how many special game states to make the transition to before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game feature where you decide whether to win the result or not.

[Appendix F16]
A first special symbol display for executing a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314L, 314R) using a first special symbol. Department (371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) using a second special symbol; 372) and
When the result of the second special judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315) is a specific result (small win) different from the one that causes the transition to the special gaming state. When activated, a game ball can enter the game ball, and the game state transition means (41) grants the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) by the game ball entering the special game ball. a wing accessory device (83) having a spherical portion (833);
Furthermore,
The gaming state transition means (41) is
Transitioning to the special gaming state triggered by the result of the first special determination or the second special determination being a transition to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot);
The second gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. to move to
Based on the right to transition to the special game state (class 2 jackpot) that is granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry section (833), after the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed. Shifting to the special gaming state,
The third game state (mode E) is shifted to after the special game in the special game state, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the special ball entry section (833), is completed. The gaming machine described in appendix F8.

[Appendix F17]
The game state transition means (41), when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number in the second game state or the third game state, The gaming machine according to appendix F16, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to a first gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary notes F16 and F17, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is one that causes the transition to a special gaming state (Type 1 jackpot), or the game ball enters the special ball entry section. By doing so, the right to move to the special gaming state is granted (type 2 jackpot), and the player moves to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states from the first to the third gaming state can also be applied to a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine.

[Appendix F18]
The first detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second path (352), or the second detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. normal determination means that uses the detection as a trigger to normally determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position); Further comprising (41),
The second gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') are different from the first gaming state (mode A) by the normal determining means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F3 to F17, characterized in that in the normal determination, there is a high probability that it will be determined that the movable accessory member (36) is activated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18, the probability that the movable accessory member is determined to be activated in the normal determination by the normal determination means is different between the second gaming state, the third gaming state, and the first gaming state. Thereby, three game states from the first to the third game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix F19]
In the second gaming state (Mode C, Mode C'), compared to the first gaming state (Mode A), the game ball passes through the second path (352) by the first detection means (318). The gaming machine according to appendices F1 to F18, characterized in that the time from when the movable accessory member (36) is detected to when the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is started is short.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F19, in the second gaming state, compared to the first gaming state, the movable accessory member is not operated after the first detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage. It takes a short time to start. Thereby, three game states from the first to the third game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix F20]
In the third gaming state (mode E, mode E'), compared to the first gaming state (mode A) and the second gaming state (mode C, mode C'), the movable accessory member (36) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F19, characterized in that the operating time is long.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F20, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the third gaming state than in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Thereby, three game states from the first to the third game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning hole and the second winning hole are different can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix G1]
Multiple prize openings into which game balls can enter,
A first position where entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening (315) among the plurality of winning openings is restricted, and a first position where entry of a gaming ball into the specific winning opening (315) is permitted. a movable accessory member (36) operable between two positions;
A retreat guide part (393, 394) that is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guides the game ball in a direction away from the specific winning opening (315);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, a retreat guide portion is provided above the movable accessory member to guide the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and it is encouraged to launch the game machine to the left side area of the game board, the specific winning hole in the movable accessory member Since the game ball can be received at a location away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches a specific prize opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching a specific prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the standby position, so hitting methods that are not encouraged When doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G2]
The retreat guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner such that the nails on the side far from the specific winning opening (315) are located lower than the nails on the side closer to the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in appendix G1.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G2, the game ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Furthermore, in a game machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven into the game board, it is possible to provide a retraction guiding section when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retreat guiding part, and to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix G3]
The plurality of winning holes further include a predetermined winning hole (314R) that has a different function from the specific winning hole (315),
The movable accessory member (36) is a first member that allows the game ball to enter the specific winning hole (315) and restricts the game ball from entering the predetermined winning hole (314R). position (standby position), and a second position (operation position) that restricts the entry of game balls into the specific winning opening (315) and allows the entry of gaming balls into the predetermined winning opening (314R). The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or G2, characterized in that the gaming machine is operable between the two positions.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G3, entry of the game ball into a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is operated. Specifically, when the movable accessory member is in the first position where it is not operating, the game ball is allowed to enter a specific winning hole, while the game ball is not allowed to enter a predetermined winning hole. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the game ball is restricted from entering a specific winning hole, while the game ball is allowed to enter a predetermined winning hole. In this way, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole, but also prevents the game ball from entering a predetermined winning hole. Allow or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G4]
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the predetermined winning hole (314R, 314) is opened to allow the game ball to enter the predetermined winning hole (314R, 314),
By covering the predetermined winning hole (314R) in the second position (operating position), the predetermined winning hole (314R) is closed and the entry of game balls into the predetermined winning hole (314R) is restricted. The gaming machine according to appendix G3, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G4, the movable accessory member is provided in a position where a predetermined winning hole can be opened and closed, which is a simple configuration, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter a specific winning hole. Alternatively, it is possible to not only restrict, but also allow or restrict the entry of game balls into a predetermined winning opening.

[Appendix G5]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The predetermined prize opening (314R, 314) is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) can enter,
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while entering the specific winning opening (315). restricting the entry of
In the second position (operating position), the game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) are restricted from entering the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while entering the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix G4, wherein the gaming machine allows the entry of a ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G5, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of the operation, entry of the game ball into a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls sorted into the second passage are allowed to enter a predetermined prize opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where it is not in operation, while the game balls are allowed to enter the predetermined prize opening. When the entry of the game ball into the winning opening is restricted, and when the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined winning opening is restricted, while the entering of the gaming ball into the specific winning opening is restricted. Game balls are allowed to enter the ball. In this way, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G5, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into a specific winning hole, but also controls the predetermined number of game balls distributed to the second passage. Allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the prize opening at the same time. In the gaming machine according to appendix G5, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate to make it possible to change the ball entry ratio between a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G6]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) between the second passageway (352) and the prescribed winning opening (314R) into the prescribed winning opening (314R). ), the predetermined winning opening (314R) is set in the open state at the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening (314R) is set in the open state at the second position (operating position). 314R) in the closed state.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G6, a part of the movable accessory member serves as an opening/closing part between the second passage and the predetermined winning opening, and moves the game ball that has passed through the second passage toward the prescribed winning opening. With a simple configuration in which a movable accessory member is installed in the middle of the route, for example, at a position where a predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed, the movable accessory member can not only allow or restrict entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening. , allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into a predetermined winning opening can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix G7]
The movable accessory member (36) is continuous with the opening/closing part (362) and includes a guide part (363) that moves a game ball launched onto the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362). ), the gaming machine according to appendix G6.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G7, a part of the movable accessory member is provided as a guide part continuous to the opening/closing part at a position where the game ball launched in the right side area is moved toward the opening/closing part. By using the movable accessory member, it is possible not only to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into a specific winning opening, but also to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix G8]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315), and a first portion (361R) that allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315). (315), and a second portion (362R) for causing a game ball to enter the second prize opening (315) from the right side.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G8, the movable accessory member has a first portion that allows the game ball to enter the second winning port from the left side of the second winning port, and a first portion that allows the game ball to enter the second winning port from the right side of the second winning port. 2. A second portion for causing the ball to enter the winning hole. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with a first part and a second part, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning hole and the second winning hole. Allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the ball can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix G9]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), allowing a game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first starting port (314);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) to enter the second prize opening (352), and The gaming machine according to appendix G8, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (352).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G9, the first portion of the movable accessory member allows the game balls in the second passage of the sorting device to enter the second prize opening. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a sorting device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter the first prize opening. It is possible to simultaneously permit or restrict entry of game balls into the second prize opening.

[Appendix G10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to Appendix G8 or G9, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10, due to the simple configuration in which a penetration part is provided between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be The ball can be moved to the penetration part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix G11]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
In the first portion (361R), entry of the game ball passing through the second passageway (352) into the specific winning hole (351) is restricted at the first position (operating position), and the allow in a second position (actuation position);
In the second portion (362R), entry of the game ball launched into the right side area of the game board (31) into the specific winning hole (351) is restricted at the first position (operating position); The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G8 to G10, wherein the game machine is allowed in the second position (operating position).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11, due to the simple configuration of providing a penetration part between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be The ball can be moved to the penetration part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix G12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) have their tips close to each other at the first position (standby position), and are close to each other at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix G3, characterized in that the leading end portions of the game machine are spaced apart from each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole, but also allows or restricts the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning hole.

[Appendix G13]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passageway (352), and is located at the first position (standby position). The game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) interfere with each other to move the game balls towards the predetermined winning opening (314), and the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) in the operating position The gaming machine according to appendix G12, characterized in that the gaming ball is moved toward the specific winning hole (315) by interference.

In the game machine according to Appendix G13, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on whether or not the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are operated, entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning opening and the specific winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member as movable accessory members are in the standby position, the game balls sorted to the second path are delivered to the predetermined winning opening. While the entry of the game ball into a specific winning hole is restricted, when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are in the operating position, the entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning hole is restricted. While the entry of game balls is restricted, the entry of game balls into specific winning holes is permitted. In this way, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G13, the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member not only allow or restrict entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening, but also allow At the same time, it is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls sorted into predetermined winning slots. The gaming machine according to appendix G13 can vary the ball entry ratio between the predetermined winning hole and the specific winning hole by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G14]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
A gap is formed between the specific winning hole (315) and the game ball through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is directed toward the specific winning hole (315). A guiding part (31M') to be moved;
Furthermore,
The movable accessory members (36S to 36X) are
At the first position (standby position), the specific prize opening (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) and is launched to the right area of the game board (31). Restricting the entry of game balls into the specific prize opening (315);
In the second position (operating position), the specific winning opening (315) is opened, and a passage for the game ball is formed between the guiding part (31M') and the specific winning opening (315). Supplementary note G1 or supplementary note characterized in that the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) and the game ball that has been launched into the right side area are allowed to enter the specific winning hole (315). A gaming machine described in G2.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G14, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, a passage for the game ball is formed between the guiding part and the specific winning hole, so that the second passage of the sorting device is controlled. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball shot out to the right side area of the game board can be caused to enter a specific winning hole by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it becomes possible to make a game ball enter a specific winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix G15]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position),
The first position (standby position) is a position where the specific winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened,
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the specific winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G15 has a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is slid between a first position where the specific winning opening is closed and a second position where the gap between the guiding part and the specific winning opening is closed. , it becomes possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix G16]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36W) is movable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the specific winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened,
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the specific winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix G17]
The gaming machine according to appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the gaming board (31).

[Appendix G18]
The game machine according to appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

In the gaming machines according to appendices G16 to G18, the movable accessory member is rotated in the horizontal direction between a first position where a specific winning opening is closed and a second position where a gap between the guiding part and the specific winning opening is closed. With this simple configuration, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix G19]
The gaming machine according to appendix G18, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright position at the second starting port (315) and at a third position (standby position) where the gap is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G19, there is no need to provide an evacuation guidance part, and in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is released for a short time, the game ball in the right area of the distribution device is movable. It can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port by the accessory member.

[Appendix G20]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable and includes a closing part (364W) that can close the second starting port (315) and the gap, and opens the second starting port (315) and the gap. It has a possible penetration part (363W),
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second prize opening (315) is closed by the closing part (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W),
The second position (operating position) is characterized in that the second prize opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing part (364W). The gaming machine described in Appendix G14.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G20 has a simple configuration in which a movable accessory member having a closing part and a penetrating part is rotated, and a game ball is caused to enter the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. becomes possible.

[Appendix G21]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position) in the gap. It is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A first penetrating portion (361X) that penetrates along a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis and through which a game ball can pass; It has a second penetration part (362X) through which the ball can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetration part (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetration part (361X) communicates with the specific winning opening (315).

The gaming machine according to Appendix G21 has a simple configuration in which a rotary body is rotated between a specific winning opening and the guiding part, and a single movable accessory member allows game balls to enter a specific winning opening from a plurality of routes. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix G22]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the specific winning opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G14 to G21, further comprising a guard portion (31B) that prevents the winning hole from exceeding the specific winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G22, by providing the guard part, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward a specific winning opening can be reliably won a specific prize. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix G23]
a detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that a game ball has passed through the second passageway (352), the movable accessory member (36) is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second passageway (352). normal determination means (41) for normally determining whether or not to operate between the 2nd position (operating position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G5 to G7 to G11 and G13 to G22, further comprising:

In the game machine according to Appendix G23, a game ball detection means is provided in the second passageway that allows the game ball to enter a specific prize opening by the operation of the movable accessory member, and the game ball is detected by the detection means. When the movable accessory member is activated, the normal judgment means makes a normal judgment as to whether or not to operate the movable accessory member. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G23, although the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage, it is difficult to determine whether or not the movable accessory member is activated, that is, whether the movable accessory member is activated or not. Whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter is determined according to the result of the normal determination. Therefore, whether the game ball in the second passage enters a specific winning hole depends on the result of the normal determination, so the game is less likely to become monotonous and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix G24]
The specific winning hole (315) makes a special judgment (jackpot) on whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G23, characterized in that the gaming machine provides an opportunity to perform a lottery.

[Appendix G25]
The gaming machine according to any one of notes G1 to G24, wherein the specific winning hole (313') is a general winning hole.

[Appendix H1]
A plurality of winning holes (314, 315) into which game balls can enter,
A first position (standby position) where entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole (315) among the plurality of winning holes (314, 315) is restricted, and a game to the specific winning hole (315). A movable accessory member that is movable between a second position (operating position) where the ball is allowed to enter, and moves the game ball toward the specific winning hole (315) in the second position. 36) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) has a delay portion (364) that delays the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, a delay part is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to a specific winning hole. Therefore, even if a game ball is received by the movable accessory member due to a player hitting right in a game state where the movable accessory member has a short operating time and left-handed hitting is encouraged, for example, the delay section will prevent the game ball from being received by the movable accessory member. It is possible to secure a longer time until it reaches a specific prize opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching a specific prize opening in a short period of time from when the movable accessory member starts operating until it returns to the standby position, so hitting methods that are not encouraged When this is done, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves the game ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix H3]
The delay portions (364D to 364H) include one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix H1 or H2.

[Appendix H4]
According to any of appendices H1 to H3, wherein the delay portions (364I to 364P) are a plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) arranged discretely. The game machine described.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to appendix H4, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices H2 to H5, the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix H6]
From appendix H1, the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotating shaft extending in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine described in any of Appendix H5.

[Appendix H7]
The gaming machine according to appendix H6, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix H8]
The gaming machine according to appendix H6 or H7, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices H6 to H8, the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, which not only improves the design of the gaming machine, but also improves the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory member. Since it becomes easier to draw attention to the game, the interest in the game increases.

[Appendix H9]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution part (38), and is launched into the left side area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). a sorting device (35) for distributing the game balls into either the first passageway (351) or the second passageway (352) by the sorting section (38);
a first detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
a second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31);
Furthermore,
The movable accessory member (36) is
When the passing of a game ball is detected by the first detection means (318) or the second detection means (319), the game ball is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position). ,
When in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passageway (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H8.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H9, not only the gaming balls passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming balls launched to the right side area of the gaming board are directed by the movable accessory member to enter a specific winning slot. can be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to make a game ball enter a specific winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix H10]
A supplementary note characterized in that the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is longer when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied than when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in H9.

[Appendix H11]
It is better to launch a game ball into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318), and it is better to hit the game ball into the right side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than a case where the game ball is hit in the right area; a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318); Further comprising a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the state,
The first condition is that the game is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix H10, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H10 and Appendix H11, the ease with which a game ball enters a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member is determined depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. are considered to be different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is met, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and the game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter a specific winning hole, etc., depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease with which the game ball lands in a specific winning hole. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix H12]
The specific winning hole (315) is configured such that the time required for the game ball detected by the second detecting means (319) to enter the specific winning hole (315) is determined by the first detecting means (318). ) The game machine according to appendix H11, characterized in that the game ball is located at a position that is longer than the time required for the ball to enter the specific winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H12, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter a specific winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the second detection means to enter a specific winning hole. The time required to enter the ball differs. Therefore, for example, while it is possible for a game ball launched on the left side of the game board to enter a specific winning hole, it is difficult for a game ball launched on the right side to enter a specific winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix H13]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the first detection means (318) is in the specific winning hole. (315) to allow the ball to be entered, and to restrict the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) from entering the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine described in appendix H11 or H12 as a feature.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H13, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering a specific winning hole when hitting right in the first game state where left hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed batting is encouraged in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. becomes possible.

[Appendix H14]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) is in the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H13, characterized in that the time is for allowing a ball to be entered.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H14, by hitting right in the second gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter a specific winning hole. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix H15]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The predetermined prize opening (314R, 314) is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) can enter,
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while entering the specific winning opening (315). restricting the entry of
In the second position (operating position), the game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) are restricted from entering the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while entering the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H14, wherein the gaming machine allows the entry of a ball.

In the game machine according to appendix H15, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and when the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of the operation, entry of the game ball into a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls sorted into the second passage are allowed to enter a predetermined prize opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where it is not in operation, while the game balls are allowed to enter the predetermined prize opening. When the entry of the game ball into the winning opening is restricted, and when the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined winning opening is restricted, while the entering of the gaming ball into the specific winning opening is restricted. game balls are allowed to enter. In this way, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H15, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into a specific winning hole, but also controls the predetermined number of game balls distributed to the second passage. Allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the prize opening at the same time. The gaming machine according to appendix H15 can vary the ball entry ratio between a specific winning hole and a predetermined winning hole by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H16]
The movable accessory member (36) is configured to move the game ball that has passed through the second path (352) between the second path (352) and the predetermined winning hole (314R) into the predetermined winning hole (314R). ), the predetermined winning opening (314R) is set in the open state in the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening ( 314R) into the closed state.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H16, a part of the movable accessory member serves as an opening/closing part between the second passage and the predetermined winning opening, and moves the game ball that has passed through the second passage toward the prescribed winning opening. With a simple configuration in which a movable accessory member is installed in the middle of the route, for example, at a position where a predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed, the movable accessory member can not only allow or restrict entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening. Entry of game balls into a predetermined prize opening can be permitted or restricted at the same time.

[Appendix H17]
The movable accessory member (36) is continuous with the opening/closing part (362) and includes a guide part (363) that moves a game ball launched onto the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362). ), the gaming machine according to appendix H16.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H17, a part of the movable accessory member is provided as a guide part continuous with the opening/closing part at a position where the game ball launched in the right side area is moved toward the opening/closing part. By using the movable accessory member, it is possible not only to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into a specific winning opening, but also to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix H18]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first part (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315) from the left side of the specific winning opening (315), and a first part (361R) that allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315) from the left side of the specific winning opening (315) The gaming machine according to any one of appendix H1 to appendix H17, further comprising a second portion (362R) for causing a game ball to enter the specific winning hole (315) from the right side of (315). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H18, the movable accessory member includes a first part that allows the game ball to enter the specific winning hole from the left side of the specific winning hole, and a first part that allows the game ball to enter the specific winning hole from the right side of the specific winning hole. and a second part for allowing the ball to enter the winning hole. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with a first part and a second part, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into a predetermined winning opening, and allows the movable accessory member to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into a specified winning opening. Allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the ball can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix H19]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), allowing a game ball passing through the second passage to enter the other specific starting port (314),
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) to enter the specific winning opening (315), and The gaming machine according to appendix H18, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the specific winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H19, the first part of the movable accessory member allows the game balls in the second passage of the sorting device to enter a specific winning hole. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a sorting device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter a predetermined winning opening. It is possible to simultaneously permit or restrict entry of game balls into a specific prize opening.

[Appendix H20]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix H18 or H19, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H20, due to the simple configuration of providing a penetration part between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be The ball can be moved to the penetration part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix H21]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
In the first portion (361R), entry of the game ball passing through the second passageway (352) into the specific winning hole (315) is restricted at the first position (operating position), and the allow in a second position (actuation position);
In the second portion (362R), entry of a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) into the specific winning hole (315) is restricted at the first position (operating position); The gaming machine according to appendix H19 or H20, wherein the gaming machine is allowed in the second position (operating position).

In the game machine according to appendix H21, due to the simple configuration of providing a penetration part between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be The ball can be moved to the penetration part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix H22]
The specific winning hole (315) makes a special judgment (jackpot) on whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H121, characterized in that the gaming machine provides an opportunity to perform a lottery.

[Appendix H23]
The plurality of winning holes are used for a first special determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of game balls. ) and whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) in which a special game (jackpot gaming) advantageous to the player is executed by the first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to play A second prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to perform a second special judgment (jackpot lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
Compared to the first special judgment, the second special judgment has a higher degree of expectation that a judgment result that will cause the player to move to the second special game will be obtained;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H22, wherein the specific winning opening (315) is the second winning opening.

[Appendix I1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
A game machine characterized in that the distribution section (38) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the sorting section of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency (individual differences between gaming machines) of the distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and through trial and error, find out the launch position of the game ball that makes it easier for the game ball to be distributed to the second aisle. It is fun to find the launching position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball is distributed from those game machines to the second passage. It becomes possible to enjoy searching for easy-to-understand gaming machines.

[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the distribution section (38D, 38F) has a fixed section (381D, 389F) that is immovable and non-rotatable.

In the game machine according to Appendix I2, the determination is made by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed part. Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to appendix I2, wherein the fixed part (381D, 389F) has one end fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I2 to I4, wherein the fixing portions (381D, 389F) are nails.

In the gaming machines according to Appendices I3 to I5, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part can be plastically changed, so if the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial setting value, the fixed part can be returned to the initial position. It will be possible to return it. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the allocation ratio over time.

[Appendix I6]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
Appendices I2 to I5, wherein the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail at the top and a vertical line passing through this one nail as an axis of symmetry when viewed from the front. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, by adjusting the nail at the top, it is possible to improve the imbalance in the allocation ratio over time.

[Appendix I7]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first path (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second path (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I2 to I5, characterized in that it is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I7, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix I8]
The gaming machine according to appendix I7, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix I9]
The sorting section (38C) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first passageway (351), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, toward the second passageway (352). The gaming machine according to appendix I1, characterized in that the gaming machine is a roller fixed to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the gaming ball.

In the game machines according to Appendix I8 and I9, a rotating body such as a freely rotatable roller is used as the distribution part, and this rotating body also prevents accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with the rotating body. determined by Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix J1]
A first prize opening (314, 314R, 313') into which game balls can enter;
a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can be inserted and which has a different function from the first winning hole (314, 314R, 313');
Restricting entry of game balls into one of the first winning hole (314, 314R, 313') and the second winning hole (315) (314, 314R, 313'), and A first position (standby position) that allows a game ball to enter the other winning hole (315) different from the one winning hole (314, 314R), and the one winning hole (314, 314R, 313'). A movable accessory member ( 36, 36R, 36S) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, the game ball is allowed to enter one of the first winning hole and the second winning hole depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. A state in which the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and a state where the entry of a gaming ball into one winning opening is restricted while the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted. Any of the permissible states is achieved. In this way, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of a game ball into one winning opening, but also prevents the entry of a gaming ball into the other winning opening. Allow or restrict at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting game machine that has new playability depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J2]
The movable accessory member (36) is
The first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the open state at the first position (standby position), and the first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the closed state at the second position (operating position). an opening/closing part (362),
Continuing with the opening/closing part (362), restricting the movement of the game ball to the right of the first prize opening toward the opening/closing part (362) in the first position (standby position), a guide part (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the first prize opening toward the opening/closing part (362) in the operating position);
The gaming machine according to appendix J1, characterized in that it has the following.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, a movable accessory member is provided which has an opening/closing part that can open and close the first winning opening and a guide part that moves the game ball on the right side of the first winning opening towards the opening/closing part. With a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning hole and allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning hole at the same time.

[Appendix J3]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The opening/closing part (362) is
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second path (352) is allowed to enter the first winning hole (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning hole Restricting the ball entering the mouth (315),
In the second position (operating position), the game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) are restricted from entering the second winning opening (314R, 313'); Allowing the ball to enter the mouth (315),
The guide part is
At the first position (standby position), movement of the game ball launched into the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362) is restricted; and at the second position (operating position), the game board The game machine according to appendix J2, characterized in that the game ball launched into the right side area of (31) is allowed to move toward the opening/closing part (362).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device and the game balls are activated by the movable accessory member. Depending on the presence or absence of the game ball, entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the game ball distributed to the second path is transferred to the first prize opening by the movable accessory member. Allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole and allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening are performed at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J4]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315), and a first portion (361R) that allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315). (315), and a second portion (362R) for causing a game ball to enter the second prize opening (315) from the right side.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4, the movable accessory member has a first portion that allows the game ball to enter the second winning port from the left side of the second winning port, and a first portion that allows the game ball to enter the second winning port from the right side of the second winning port. 2. A second portion for causing the ball to enter the winning hole. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with a first part and a second part, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning hole and the second winning hole. Allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the ball can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix J5]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), allowing a game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first starting port (314);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) to enter the second prize opening (352), and The gaming machine according to appendix J4, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (352).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5, the first part of the movable accessory member allows the game balls in the second passage of the sorting device to enter the second prize opening. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a sorting device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter the first prize opening. It is possible to allow or restrict entry of the game ball into the second prize opening at the same time.

[Appendix J6]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix J4 or J5, wherein the first part (361R) and the second part (362R) are inclined to become lower toward the penetrating part (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, due to the simple configuration of providing a penetration part between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be The ball can be moved to the penetration part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix J7]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) have their tips close to each other at the first position (standby position), and are close to each other at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix J1, characterized in that the leading end portions of the gaming machines are spaced apart from each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or restrict entry of game balls into the first winning opening and allow or restrict entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening.

[Appendix J8]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passageway (352), and is located at the first position (standby position). The game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) interfere with each other, causing the game balls to move toward the first prize opening (314), and at the second position (operating position), the second passageway (352) is moved. The gaming machine according to appendix J7, characterized in that the passing gaming balls interfere with each other to move the gaming balls toward the second prize opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J8, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are placed in the second passage by the sorting device as the first movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated, entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to appendix J8, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the game ball distributed to the second path is transferred to the first prize opening by the movable accessory member. Allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole and allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening are performed at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J9]
Further comprising a first detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a first specific area (352) through which the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board can pass,
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of a game ball is detected by the first detection means (318). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to I8, characterized in that the gaming machine is operated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J9, when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first detection means, the movable accessory member allows the gaming ball to enter the second prize opening. Thereby, the movable accessory member can cause the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board to enter the second winning hole.

[Appendix J10]
Further comprising a second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a second specific area through which the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board can pass,
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of a game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is operated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J10, when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the second detection means, the movable accessory member allows the gaming ball to enter the second prize opening. Thereby, the movable accessory member can cause the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board to enter the second winning hole.

[Appendix J11]
The first winning hole (314R, 314) is the first winning hole (314R, 314) that determines whether to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed due to the entry of a game ball. This provides an opportunity to make a special judgment (jackpot lottery).
The second winning hole (315) makes a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by the entry of a game ball. It provides an opportunity to perform a jackpot lottery.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J10, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation that a determination result that causes the transition to the second special game will be obtained than the first special determination. .

[Appendix J12]
The first winning hole (313') is a general winning hole, and the second winning hole (315) is a special game state in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. This provides an opportunity to make a special judgment (jackpot lottery) on whether or not to move to (jackpot gaming state).
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J10, characterized in that:

[Appendix K1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). a sorting device (35) for sorting into either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
A first prize opening into which game balls can enter,
a first prize opening (314) into which game balls that have passed through the first passageway (351) or the second passageway (352) can enter;
a second prize opening into which a game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) can enter, and which has a different function from the first prize opening;
A first position (standby position) that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening (315), and a second position (activation position) that allows the entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (36S to 36X) that can be operated between the
A gap is formed between the second winning hole (315) and the game ball through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is directed toward the second winning hole (315). A guiding part (31M') to be moved;
Equipped with
The movable accessory members (36S to 36X) are
At the first position (standby position), the second prize opening (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) and is launched to the right area of the game board (31). Restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize opening (315),
In the second position (operating position), the second winning hole (315) is opened, and a passage for the game ball is formed between the guiding part (31M') and the second winning hole (315). The game machine is characterized in that a game ball launched into the right side area is allowed to enter the second winning hole (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, a passage for the game ball is formed between the guiding part and the second prize opening, so that the second passage of the sorting device is controlled. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball shot out to the right side area of the game board can be caused to enter the second prize opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix K2]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) have their tips close to each other at the first position (standby position), and are close to each other at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix K1, characterized in that the leading end portions of the game machine are spaced apart from each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or restrict entry of game balls into the first winning opening and allow or restrict entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening.

[Appendix K3]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passageway (352), and is located at the first position (standby position). The game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) interfere with each other, causing the game balls to move toward the first prize opening (314), and at the second position (operating position), the second passageway (352) is moved. The game machine according to appendix K2, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second prize opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K3, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are placed in the second passage by the sorting device as the first movable accessory as a movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated, entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to appendix K3, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the game ball distributed to the second path is transferred to the first prize opening by the movable accessory member. Allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole and allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening are performed at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K4]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position),
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second prize opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened,
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second prize opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

The gaming machine according to appendix K4 has a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is slid between the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guiding part and the second winning opening is closed. , it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix K5]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36V) is movable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second prize opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened,
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position in which the second prize opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix K6]
The gaming machine according to appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the gaming board (31).

[Appendix K7]
The game machine according to appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

In the gaming machines according to Appendix K5 to Appendix K7, the movable accessory member is moved in the horizontal direction at the first position where the second winning opening is closed and at the second position where the gap between the guiding part and the second winning opening is closed. With the simple configuration of rotating the ball, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member.

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to appendix K7, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at the second starting port (315) and at a third position (standby position) where the gap is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K8, there is no need to provide an evacuation guidance part, and in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is released for a short time, the gaming ball in the right area of the distribution device is movable. It can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port by the accessory member.

[Appendix K9]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable and includes a closing part (364W) that can close the second starting port (315) and the gap, and opens the second starting port (315) and the gap. It has a possible penetration part (363W),
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second prize opening (315) is closed by the closing part (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W),
The second position (operating position) is characterized in that the second prize opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing part (364W). The gaming machine described in Appendix K1.

The gaming machine according to appendix K9 has a simple configuration in which a movable accessory member having a closing part and a penetrating part is rotated, and a game ball is caused to enter the second prize opening from a plurality of paths using one movable accessory member. becomes possible.

[Appendix K10]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position) in the gap. It is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A first penetrating portion (361X) that penetrates along a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis and through which a game ball can pass; It has a second penetration part (362X) through which the ball can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetration part (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetration portion (361X) communicates with the second starting port (315).

The gaming machine according to appendix K10 has a simple configuration in which a rotary body is rotated between the second winning opening and the guiding part, so that game balls can be entered from a plurality of routes into the second winning opening using one movable accessory member. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix K11]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the second prize opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K4 to K10, further comprising a guard portion (31B) that prevents the player from exceeding the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K11, by providing the guard part, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward the second starting port reliably enters the second prize. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix L1]
A plurality of winning holes (314, 315) into which game balls can enter,
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution part (38), and is launched into the left side area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). a sorting device (35) for distributing the game balls into either the first passageway (351) or the second passageway (352) by the sorting section (38);
A first position (standby position) that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening (315), and a second position (activation position) that allows the entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening (314R). a movable accessory member (36) movable between the
a first detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passageway (352);
a second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided on the right side area of the game board (31);
Furthermore,
The movable accessory member (36) is
When the passing of a game ball is detected by the first detection means (318) or the second detection means (319), the game ball is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position). ,
When in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passageway (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the specific winning hole (315). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to appendix L1, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the game balls launched on the right side area of the game board are directed by the movable accessory member to enter a specific winning hole. can be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to make a game ball enter a specific winning hole from a plurality of routes using one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new gameplay features.

[Appendix L2]
A supplementary note characterized in that the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is longer when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied than when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in L1.

[Appendix L3]
It is better to launch a game ball into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318), and it is better to hit the game ball into the right side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than a case where the game ball is hit in the right area; a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball is launched into the left side area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318); Further comprising a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the state,
The first condition is that the game is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix L2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix L2 and appendix L3, the ease with which a game ball enters a specific prize opening by the movable accessory member is determined depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. are considered to be different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is met, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and the game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter a specific winning hole, etc., depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease with which the game ball lands in a specific winning hole. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix L4]
The specific winning hole (315) is configured such that the time required for the game ball detected by the second detecting means (319) to enter the specific winning hole (315) is determined by the first detecting means (318). ) The game machine according to appendix L3, characterized in that the game ball is located at a position longer than the time required for the ball to enter the specific winning hole (315).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix L4, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter the specific winning hole, and the time required for the game ball detected by the second detection means to enter the specific winning hole. The time required to enter the ball is different. Therefore, for example, while it is possible for a game ball launched on the left side of the game board to enter a specific winning hole, it is difficult for a game ball launched on the right side to enter a specific winning hole. becomes possible. As a result, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so the player is encouraged to play left-handed batting in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. It becomes possible to do so.

[Appendix L5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the game ball detected by the first detection means (318) is in the specific winning hole. (315) to allow the ball to be entered, and to restrict the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) from entering the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine described in appendix L3 or L4 as a feature.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix L5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering a specific winning hole when the player hits right-handed in the first game state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged (for example, the first game state), the player will be in a disadvantageous situation, so left-handed batting is encouraged in situations where left-handed batting is encouraged. becomes possible.

[Appendix L6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) is in the specific winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L3 to L5, characterized in that the time is for allowing a ball to be entered.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix L6, by hitting right in the second gaming state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter a specific winning hole. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix L7]
The movable accessory member (36) is
The first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the open state at the first position (standby position), and the first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the closed state at the second position (operating position). an opening/closing part (362),
Continuing with the opening/closing part (362), restricting the movement of the game ball to the right of the first prize opening toward the opening/closing part (362) in the first position (standby position), a guide part (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the first prize opening toward the opening/closing part (362) in the operating position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, characterized in that it has the following.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix L7, a movable accessory member is provided that has an opening/closing part that can open and close the first winning opening and a guide part that moves the game ball on the right side of the first winning opening towards the opening/closing part. With a simple configuration, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning hole and allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning hole at the same time.

[Appendix L8]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The opening/closing part (362) is
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second path (352) is allowed to enter the first winning hole (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning hole Restricting the ball entering the mouth (315),
In the second position (operating position), the game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) are restricted from entering the second winning opening (314R, 313'); Allowing the ball to enter the mouth (315),
The guide part is
At the first position (standby position), movement of the game ball launched into the right side area of the game board (31) toward the opening/closing part (362) is restricted; and at the second position (operating position), the game board (31) The game machine according to appendix L7, wherein the game ball launched into the right side area is allowed to move toward the opening/closing part (362).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L8, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are sorted into the second passage by the sorting device and the game balls are moved by the actuation of the movable accessory member. Depending on the presence or absence of the game ball, entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to appendix L8, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the game ball distributed to the second path is transferred to the first prize opening by the movable accessory member. Allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening and allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening are performed at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L9]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) that allows a game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315), and a first portion (361R) that allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole (315) from the left side of the second winning hole (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, further comprising: a second portion (362R) for causing a game ball to enter the second prize opening (315) from the right side of the second winning hole (315). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix L9, the movable accessory member has a first portion that allows the game ball to enter the second winning port from the left side of the second winning port, and a first portion that allows the game ball to enter the second winning port from the right side of the second winning port. 2. A second portion for causing the ball to enter the winning hole. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided with a first part and a second part, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the first winning hole and the second winning hole. Allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the ball can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix L10]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), allowing a game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first starting port (314);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (352) to enter the second prize opening (352), and The gaming machine according to appendix L9, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to enter the second winning hole (352).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L10, the first part of the movable accessory member allows the game balls in the second passage of the sorting device to enter the second prize opening. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a sorting device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter the first prize opening. It is possible to allow or restrict entry of the game ball into the second prize opening at the same time.

[Appendix L11]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix L9 or L10, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L11, due to the simple configuration of providing a penetration part between the first part and the second part having different inclination states, both the game balls in the second passage and the game balls in the right side area can be The ball can be moved to the penetration part and entered into a specific winning hole.

[Appendix L12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) have their tips close to each other at the first position (standby position), and are close to each other at the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, characterized in that the leading end portions of the game machine are spaced apart from each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or restrict entry of game balls into the first winning opening and allow or restrict entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening.

[Appendix L13]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and the game balls introduced from the introduction port (350) are transferred to the distribution section (38). further comprising a sorting device (35) for sorting to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passageway (352), and is located at the first position (standby position). The game balls that have passed through the second passageway (352) interfere with each other, causing the game balls to move toward the first prize opening (314), and at the second position (operating position), the second passageway (352) is moved. The game machine according to appendix L12, characterized in that the game balls that have passed through interfere with each other to move the game balls toward the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L13, the game balls are sorted into the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are placed in the second passage by the sorting device as the first movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are operated, entry of the game ball into the first winning hole and the second winning hole is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to appendix L13, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate, so that the game ball distributed to the second path is transferred to the first prize opening by the movable accessory member. Allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole and allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening are performed at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs the sorting device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 31B: Guard nail 314: First starting port 314L: Left first starting port 314R: Right first starting port 315: Second starting port 316: Variable winning device 316b: Variable winning port 318: First through gate 319: Second through gate 35, 35A, 35B, 35C, 35D, 35E, 35F: Sorting device 351: First passage 352: Second passage 36, 36A to 36R, 36T to 36X: Electric support member 36S: Electric tulip accessory device 3681S: Left wing member 3682S: Right wing member 361X: First penetration part 362X: Second penetration part 361X', 362X': Through hole 362: Opening/closing part 363; Guide part 363W: Through hole 363W ': Penetrating portion 364W: Closing portion 364, 364A, 364B: Delay guide 364C: Meandering groove 364D to 364G: Linear convex portion 364H: Linear concave portion 364OI to 364N: Convex portion 364O, 364P: Concave portion 364Q: Roller 371: No. 1 special symbol display 372: 2nd special symbol display 373: Normal symbol display 374: Pending number display 38, 38A, 38B: Sorting member 38C: Roller 38D: Windmill 381D: Nail 382D: Rotating body 38E: Mountain Shape fixing part 38F: Triangular nail 389F: Vertex nails 393, 394: Retraction guiding nail 41: MPU
82: Special variable winning device 824: V winning opening 824
83: Wing accessory device 833: V prize opening 99: Game ball

Claims (1)

A sorting device that has an introduction port, a first passage, a second passage, and a distribution part, and distributes game balls introduced from the introduction port to either the first passage or the second passage by the distribution part. and,
a first prize opening into which game balls sorted to the first passage can enter;
a second winning hole into which a game ball can be inserted and which has a different function from the first winning hole;
Detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage;
A first position where entry of the game ball that has passed through the second passage into the second prize opening is restricted when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage. a movable accessory member that moves to a second position where the game ball that has passed through the second passage is allowed to enter the second prize opening;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images